Installation Guide DBS3900

DBS3900
V100R009C00
Installation Guide
Issue
03
Date
2014-08-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to install the cabinets, boards, modules, and cables for the
DBS3900 in indoor and outdoor scenarios. It also provides checklists for the hardware
installation.
The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The actual
exteriors may be different.
NOTE
For details about the LampSite solution, see LampSite Installation Guide.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Solution Version
Product Version
DBS3900
l SRAN9.0
V100R009C00
l GBSS16.0
l RAN16.0
l eRAN7.0
l eRAN TDD 7.0
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Base station installation engineers
Organization
1 Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

ii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
This chapter describes the changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide.

2 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have.
3 Installation Scenarios
A DBS3900 mainly consists of the BBU and RRUs. With RRUs remotely installed, the DBS3900
can be deployed indoors and outdoors. If a DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC or DC power
supply, the BBU can be installed in an outdoor APM30H, TMC11H, TP48600A-H17B1
(shortened to TP48600A in this document), or OMB. If a DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, a 19-inch rack, or directly installed
on the wall.
4 Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
5 Obtaining the ESN
The electronic serial number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a NE. Record the ESN of the base
station before the installation for future commissioning.
6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)
This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components
in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario,
the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D).
7 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H
(Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs
in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the
BBU is installed indoors and an outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to RRUs.
8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.D).
9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)
in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario,
the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C).
(Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs
BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.C) supplies power to RRUs.
11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

iii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)
the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).
13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor +24 V DC scenario. In this
scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).
(Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs
BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to RRUs.
15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)
the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
This section describes the process for installing an OMB (Ver.C), components in the OMB
(Ver.C), and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is
installed in an OMB (Ver.C).
17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB
A BBU can be installed in an OMB in outdoor AC and DC scenarios. This section describes the
process for installing an OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables.
18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall
This chapter describes the process for installing a BBU, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B, and related cables in an indoor wall-mounted scenario.
19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
This chapter describes the process for installing components and related cables when the BBU
is installed in an indoor 19-inch rack.
20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03
This chapter describes the process for installing an IMB03, components in the IMB03, and
related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an
IMB03.
21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A
This chapter describes the process for installing components in a TP48600A and related cables
of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TP48600A.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

iv
DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10

This section describes the procedure for installing the cabinet, components, and cables in a DC
scenario where BBUs are installed in an IBC10.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.

vi
DBS3900
Installation Guide
About This Document
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

vii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide..................................................................................1
2 Installation Preparations..............................................................................................................4
2.1 Documents......................................................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Tools and Instruments....................................................................................................................................................5
2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel................................................................................................................................6
3 Installation Scenarios...................................................................................................................7
3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply.................................................................................................8
3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................39
3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................46
3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................48
4 Unpacking Check........................................................................................................................53
5 Obtaining the ESN......................................................................................................................55
6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)....................57
6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements............................................................................................................................59
6.2 Installation Process.......................................................................................................................................................63
6.3 Installing a Cabinet.......................................................................................................................................................64
6.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...................................................................................................................64
6.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.................................................................................................................................81
6.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall................................................................................................................................85
6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06...............................................................................................................................91
6.4.1 Installing an ODM06D/OFD06 on a Pole.................................................................................................................91
6.4.2 Installing the ODM06D/OFD06 on the Mounting Frame.........................................................................................93
6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.......................................................................103
6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D.............................................................................................................109
6.7 Installing Mandatory Components.............................................................................................................................111
6.7.1 Installing the BBU...................................................................................................................................................111
6.7.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...............................................................................117
6.8 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables...........................................................................................................118
6.8.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..................................................................................119
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

viii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
6.8.2 Installing the SOU...................................................................................................................................................123

6.8.3 Installing the AC Heater..........................................................................................................................................125
6.8.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H........................................................................................................129
6.8.5 Installing the DCDU-12B........................................................................................................................................134
6.8.6 Installing the GPS Surge Protector..........................................................................................................................140
6.8.7 Installing the DDF...................................................................................................................................................145
6.8.8 Installing storage batteries.......................................................................................................................................148
6.8.9 Installing an HAU01A-01.......................................................................................................................................155
6.9 Installing Cables.........................................................................................................................................................164
6.9.1 Cabling Requirements.............................................................................................................................................164
6.9.2 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................170
6.9.3 Installing Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................177
6.9.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................217
6.9.5 Installing Signal Cables...........................................................................................................................................226
6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less than or Equal to 12 RRUs.....................................................249
6.9.7 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of More Than 12 RRUs.....................................................................252
6.10 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................259
6.11 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................261
6.12 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................267
6.12.1 Sealing the Cable Holes.........................................................................................................................................268
6.12.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................273
(Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs.............................................................................................. 276
7.1 Installation Clearance Requirements..........................................................................................................................278
7.2 Installation Process.....................................................................................................................................................282
7.3 Installing a Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................283
7.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.................................................................................................................283
7.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...............................................................................................................................292
7.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..............................................................................................................................296
7.4 Installing a PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................301
7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit.....................................................................................303
7.6.1 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................305
7.6.3 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H.....................................................................................................318
7.6.4 Installing RRU Power Cables..................................................................................................................................321
7.6.5 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................................323
7.6.6 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable........................................................................326
7.6.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................327
7.7 Installation Checklist..................................................................................................................................................328
7.8 Powering On a Base Station.......................................................................................................................................331
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

ix
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
7.9 Subsequent Operations...............................................................................................................................................335

7.9.1 Sealing the Cable Holes...........................................................................................................................................336
7.9.2 Repainting................................................................................................................................................................341
8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)....................344

8.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable................................................................................................369
8.6.2 Installing the DCDU-12B........................................................................................................................................384
8.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H........................................................................................................395
8.6.6 Installing the DDF...................................................................................................................................................405
8.7.2 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................415
8.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.......................................................................................................443
8.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs....................447
8.7.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................449
8.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.........................................................................................................................450
8.10.1 Sealing the Cable Holes.........................................................................................................................................459
8.10.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................464
9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)...................467

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents

9.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.......................................................................495
9.6.2 Installing the SOU...................................................................................................................................................513
9.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H........................................................................................................519
9.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries................................................................................................................................529
9.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .............................................................................................................................540
9.7.5 Installing Signal Cables...........................................................................................................................................580
9.7.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.........................................................................................................................607
9.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base..........................................................................................................................619
9.10.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................620
(Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs...............................................................................................622
10.1 Installation Clearance Requirements........................................................................................................................624
10.2 Installation Process...................................................................................................................................................628
10.3 Installing a Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................629
10.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...............................................................................................................629
10.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.............................................................................................................................638
10.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................642
10.4 Installing a PGND Cable..........................................................................................................................................647
10.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit...................................................................................649
10.6 Installing Cables.......................................................................................................................................................651
10.6.1 Cabling Requirements...........................................................................................................................................651
10.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H...................................................................................................657
10.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables................................................................................................................................661
10.6.4 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable.........................................................................................................666
10.6.5 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable...............................................................................................................................669
10.6.6 Installing a CMUE-SLPU Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................670
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xi
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents

10.9.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base..........................................................................................................................679
10.9.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................680
11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)...................682

11.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable..............................................................................................707
11.5 Installing Mandatory Components...........................................................................................................................710
11.5.1 Installing the BBU.................................................................................................................................................710
11.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit.............................................................................716
11.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.........................................................................................................717
11.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit................................................................................718
11.6.2 Installing the AC Heater........................................................................................................................................722
11.6.3 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H......................................................................................................726
11.6.4 Installing the GPS Surge Protector........................................................................................................................731
11.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules ...........................................................................................................................743
11.7.3 Installing Power Cables.........................................................................................................................................746
11.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................758
11.7.5 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable...............................................................................................................................767
11.7.6 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................767
11.7.7 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs..................771
11.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.......................................................................................................................773
11.10 Subsequent Operations...........................................................................................................................................782
11.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base........................................................................................................................782
11.10.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................784
12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).................786

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents

12.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.....................................................................814
12.6.2 Installing the SOU.................................................................................................................................................832
12.6.3 Installing the AC Heater........................................................................................................................................834
12.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H......................................................................................................838
12.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries..............................................................................................................................848
12.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules ...........................................................................................................................859
12.7.3 Installing Power Cables.........................................................................................................................................862
12.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................890
12.7.5 Installing Signal Cables.........................................................................................................................................899
12.7.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.......................................................................................................................928
12.10.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................941
13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

..........................................................................................................................................................943
13.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.....................................................................971
13.6.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H......................................................................................................989
13.7 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1000
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xiii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
13.7.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1000

13.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .........................................................................................................................1007
13.7.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1010
13.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1020
13.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables...................................................................................................1029
13.7.6 Installing a PSU Monitoring Signal Cable and a PSU In-Position Signal Cable................................................1032
13.7.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1033
13.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1034
13.8 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1036
13.9 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1039
13.10 Subsequent Operations.........................................................................................................................................1042
13.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base......................................................................................................................1042
13.10.2 Repainting..........................................................................................................................................................1044
(Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs.............................................................................................1046
14.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1048
14.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1052
14.3 Installing a Cabinet.................................................................................................................................................1053
14.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.............................................................................................................1053
14.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...........................................................................................................................1062
14.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..........................................................................................................................1066
14.4 Installing a PGND Cable........................................................................................................................................1071
14.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit.................................................................................1073
14.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H.................................................................................................1081
14.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1085
14.6.4 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable.......................................................................................................1090
14.6.5 Installing a CMUA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable..........................................................................1093
14.9.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................1104
15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).................1106

15.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.............................................................................................................1113
15.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...........................................................................................................................1122
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xiv
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
15.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..........................................................................................................................1126

15.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................1131
15.5 Installing Mandatory Components.........................................................................................................................1134
15.5.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1134
15.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...........................................................................1140
15.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.......................................................................................................1141
15.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..............................................................................1142
15.6.2 Installing the AC Heater......................................................................................................................................1146
15.6.3 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H....................................................................................................1150
15.6.4 Installing the GPS Surge Protector......................................................................................................................1155
15.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .........................................................................................................................1167
15.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs................1194
15.10 Subsequent Operations.........................................................................................................................................1206
15.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base......................................................................................................................1206
15.10.2 Repainting..........................................................................................................................................................1208
16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C).............................1210

16.3 Installing an OMB..................................................................................................................................................1215
16.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole...............................................................................................................................1215
16.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall...............................................................................................................................1218
16.4 Installing the BBU..................................................................................................................................................1221
16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector.........................................................................................................................1227
16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules..........................................................................................................................1237
16.6.3 Installing a PGND Cable.....................................................................................................................................1240
16.6.6 Installing an HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................1253
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xv
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents

16.9 Repainting...............................................................................................................................................................1264
17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB...........................................1267

17.3 Installing an OMB..................................................................................................................................................1272
17.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole...............................................................................................................................1272
17.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall...............................................................................................................................1275
17.4 Installing the BBU..................................................................................................................................................1278
17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules..........................................................................................................................1290
17.5.6 Installing an HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................1311
17.5.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable..............................................................................................1315
17.8 Repainting...............................................................................................................................................................1326
18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall..........................................1329

18.3 Installing Components on a Wall...........................................................................................................................1333
18.3.2 Installing the DCDU............................................................................................................................................1336
18.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable.....................................................................1365
18.4.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable..............................................................................................1369
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xvi
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19-Inch Rack...........................1379

19.3 Installing Components............................................................................................................................................1381
19.3.2 Installing a DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1387
19.3.3 (Optional) Installing a WGRU............................................................................................................................1389
19.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU.............................................................................................................1400
19.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable.....................................................................1418
20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03............................................1430

20.1.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB03............................................................................................1431
20.1.2 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 Mounted on an IFS06..............................................................................1433
20.3 Installing the IMB03...............................................................................................................................................1436
20.3.1 Installing an IMB03 on a Wall............................................................................................................................1437
20.3.2 Installing an IMB03 on an IFS06........................................................................................................................1448
20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03.....................................................................................................................1457
20.4.2 Installing the Power Equipment..........................................................................................................................1463
20.5.2 Cable Installation Process....................................................................................................................................1471
20.5.3 Removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03..............................................................................1472
20.5.9 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Equipment.........................................................................1498
20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist.................................................................................................................1500
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xvii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack...................................................................................................1505
21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A..............................1507

21.2 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................1511
21.3 Installing Mandatory Components.........................................................................................................................1514
21.3.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...........................................................................1520
21.4 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.......................................................................................................1521
21.4.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..............................................................................1522
21.4.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB...............................................................................................................................1525
21.4.3 Installing the GPS Surge Protector......................................................................................................................1532
21.4.4 Installing a DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1536
21.4.5 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T..............................................................................1540
21.4.6 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T..............................................................................1542
21.5.2 Routing Cables Out of a Cabinet.........................................................................................................................1552
21.5.5 Installing Signal Cables.......................................................................................................................................1586
21.8.1 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base...................................................................................................................1605
21.8.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................1606
22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10......................................1609

22.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor (Using Expansion Bolt Assemblies)...................................................1613
22.3.2 Installing a Cabinet on an ESD Floor..................................................................................................................1617
22.4 Installing a PGND Cable........................................................................................................................................1623
22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1625
22.6 Installing Components............................................................................................................................................1626
22.6.1 Installing a USU..................................................................................................................................................1627
22.6.2 Installing a BBU..................................................................................................................................................1629
22.6.3 Installing Boards in a BBU..................................................................................................................................1631
22.7.2 Cable Outlets.......................................................................................................................................................1640
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xviii
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Contents
22.7.3 Installing DCDU-12C power cables....................................................................................................................1641

22.7.4 Installing USU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1643
22.7.5 Installing BBU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1645
22.7.6 (Optional) Installing BBU Alarm Cables............................................................................................................1647
22.7.7 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for a Fan Assembly..................................................................................1650
22.7.8 (Optional) Installing Interconnection Cables......................................................................................................1650
22.7.9 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables........................................................................................................................1655
22.7.10 Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables.................................................................................................................1657
22.7.11 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................................1660
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

xix
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide

This chapter describes the changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide.
03 (2014-08-30)
This is the fifth official release.
Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), this issue includes the following new information:
l
Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D or IBBS300T

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Scenario of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts and Its Expansion Scenario
Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
l Installing the Base
Added descriptions of IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
l Installing the Cabinet

on a Base
l Stacking Two Cabinets
l 6.9.2 Cable Holes
Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), no information is deleted from this issue.
02 (2014-07-30)
This is the second official release.
Compared with issue 01 (2014-04-30), no information is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 01 (2014-04-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Topic
Change Description
Installing the Base
Modified drill holes with a depth ranging

from 52 mm (1.94 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.) to
a depth ranging from 55 mm (2.05 in.) to 60
mm (2.36 in.).
01 (2014-04-30)
This is the first official release.
Compared with issue Draft C (2014-03-26), no information is changed.
Draft C (2014-03-26)
This is a draft.
Compared with issue Draft B (2014-02-28), no information is changed or deleted.
Compared with issue Draft B (2014-02-28), this issue includes the following new information:
l
22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10 and it's child topics.
Draft B (2014-02-28)
This is a draft.
Compared with issue Draft A (2014-01-20), no information is added or deleted.
Compared with issue Draft A (2014-01-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
About This Document
Added the description of the LampSite

solution.
Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor AC

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D))
Added descriptions of the status of the

indicators for CPRI ports.
Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor

OMB (Ver.C))
Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor
OMB)
Powering On a Base Station (Indoor DC
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a
Wall)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Topic
Change Description
Powering On a Base Station (Indoor

IMB03)
Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor AC
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a
TP48600A)
Draft A (2014-01-20)
This is a draft.
Compared with multimode base station version V100R008C00, WCDMA-NodeB
V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, this issue includes the
following information:
l
Descriptions of the triple-mode base station using the UMPT+UMPT BBU interconnection
mode.
Descriptions of the UBBP.
Descriptions of the EMUB.
Scenarios where a DBS3900 is configured with 15 RRUs.

V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, this issue includes the
following changes:
Topic
Change Description
All the sections
Renamed all EPC6 connectors in this

document EPC4 connectors.

V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, no information is deleted
from this issue.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installation Preparations
About This Chapter

This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have.
2.1 Documents
Before the installation, you must be familiar with the following reference documents.
2.2 Tools and Instruments
This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel
Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.1 Documents
Before the installation, you must be familiar with the following reference documents.
l
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
DBS3900 Hardware Maintenance Guide
TP48600A-H17B1 User Guide
TP48600A-H17B1 Quick Installation Guide
OCB User Guide
For how to install RRUs, see the related RRU Installation Guide.
For how to install an IFS06 and IMB03, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
2.2 Tools and Instruments

This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Phillips screwdriver (M3 to
M6)
Marker
Diagonal pliers
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to

M6)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench
Socket wrench
Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool
RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter
Rubber mallet
Soldering iron
Wire stripper
Hammer drill (16)
Heat gun
Level

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Multimeter
Measuring tape
Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap
ESD gloves
Torque screwdriver
Gloves
Utility knife
Hydraulic pliers
Torx screwdriver
2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel

Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following:
l
The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the
proper installation and operation methods.
The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation
environment. Generally, three to five onsite personnel are necessary.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installation Scenarios
About This Chapter

A DBS3900 mainly consists of the BBU and RRUs. With RRUs remotely installed, the DBS3900
can be deployed indoors and outdoors. If a DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC or DC power
supply, the BBU can be installed in an outdoor APM30H, TMC11H, TP48600A-H17B1
(shortened to TP48600A in this document), or OMB. If a DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, a 19-inch rack, or directly installed
on the wall.
3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC
power.
3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied
with DC power.
3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with
AC power.
3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC
power.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC
power.
The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the
DBS3900 is supplied with AC power.
Table 3-1 BBU installation scenarios
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D)
BBU 0 is installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is
installed in an APM30H
(Ver.D) or TMC11H
(Ver.D), and RRUs are
installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
power to the BBUs, and the
APM30H (Ver.D) supplies
power to the RRUs.
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.C) or
APM30H (Ver.B)
The BBU is installed in an

APM30H (Ver.C) or
APM30H (Ver.B) and RRUs
are installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.C) or
APM30H (Ver.B) supplies
power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration

principles apply to the
DBS3900 of which the BBU
is installed in an APM30H
(Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of
which the BBU is installed in
an APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet.
For details, see BBU
Installed in an APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)
Cabinet, which uses an
APM30H (Ver.C) as an
example.
TP48600A
The BBU is installed in a

TP48600A and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The
TP48600A supplies power to
the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a
TP48600A
OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
supplies power to the BBU
and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Remarks
OMB (Ver.C)

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs
OMB (Ver.C) supplies

(Ver.C)
Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900

Overall principles for configuring a DBS3900
l
When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.D), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of
15 RRUs. When being configured with an OMB, a DBS3900 can support only one RRU.
When being configured with an OMB (Ver.C), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 6
RRUs. When being configured with other cabinets, a DBS3900 can support a maximum
of 12 RRUs.
During initial deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and the auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet, if required, are positioned on
the left. During capacity expansion, unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain
in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
cabinet are as follows:
l
An APM30H can be installed side by side with only one TMC11H, or it can be stacked on
a maximum of two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts. (An IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T can be stacked on another cabinet of the same type.)
An APM30H or TMC11H can be installed on the ground or stacked on an IBBS200D,

IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
An APM30H (Ver.D) can be installed side by side with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is
positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on
the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A
cabinet are as follows:
l
A TP48600A can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) side by side.
A TP48600A can be installed together with an IBB300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D, or

IBBS700T side by side.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.
Single- or dual-mode base station

An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is
configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H. When a
base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must be configured.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

DBS3900
Installation Guide
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the APM30H.
When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in
the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
A single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with
APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by
customer space requirements and carrier configurations. These setups are shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power
and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

11
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

12
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier
configurations.
Table 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No
backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

13
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
APM30H
s and
IBBS200
Ds/
IBBS200
Ts
initially
configure
d on a 1:1
ratio
l APM3
0Hs
and
IBBS
200Ds
/
IBBS
200Ts
/
IBBS
300Ds
/
IBBS
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configura
tion
4U
12
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
15 U
15
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1

ODM+1 OFD
15 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H
15 U
15
RRUs

TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
4U
12
RRUs

IBBS200D/IBBS200T
4U
15
RRUs

IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM+1
OFD
15 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
15 U
15
RRUs

TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
5U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
16 U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

14
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
300Ts
initiall
y
config
ured
on a
1:2
ratio
l APM3
0Hs
and
IBBS
700Ds
/
IBBS
700Ts
initiall
y
config
ured
on a
1:1
ratio
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configura
tion
4U
12
RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
4U
15
RRUs

IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1
ODM+1 OFD
+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
ODM+1 OFD
15 U
12
RRUs

+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS300Ts
+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
15 U
15
RRUs

IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD
IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
NOTE
When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1

ratio and there are more than six RRUs, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured in
each IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T to avoid overcurrent of a single battery pack.
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are
installed as follows:
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an
APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

15
DBS3900
Installation Guide
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU
is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the
BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruplemode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and
illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup
power
A triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with
customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure. In the following
figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows
a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

16
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station initially

configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio
APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio has a cabinet
configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the
following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site
deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

17
DBS3900
Installation Guide

configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio
customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

18
DBS3900
Installation Guide

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base
station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier
configurations.
Table 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configura
tion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
2U
12
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
13 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H

19
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configura
tion
APM30Hs
and
IBBS200D
s/
IBBS200T
s initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
2U
12
RRUs

IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
IBBS300D/IBBS300T
13 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
l APM30
Hs and
IBBS2
00Ds/
IBBS2
00Ts/
IBBS3
00Ds/
IBBS3
00Ts
initially
configu
red on a
1:2
ratio
2U
12
RRUs

IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
13 U
12
RRUs

IBBS300Ts
IBBS700T
l APM30
Hs and
IBBS7
00Ds/
IBBS7
00Ts
initially
configu
red on a
1:1
ratio
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H
(Ver.C) are shortened to TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

20
DBS3900
Installation Guide
When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in
Figure 3-9 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

21
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station initially configured
with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

22
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup
power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:2 ratio
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be

connected to a maximum of 6 RRUs with 6 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 12
groups of 2-wire fiber optical cables.
the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30H cabinets are required. The
BBU is installed in the main APM30H cabinet, which is on the left.
configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

23
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacit
y
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No
backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30
Hs and
IBBS20
0Ds/
IBBS20
0Tss
initially
configur
ed on a
1:1 ratio
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30
Hs and
IBBS20
0Ds/
IBBS20
0Tss
initially
configur
ed on a
1:2 ratio
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
12 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows:
l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is
installed in the basic APM30H on the left and BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H
on the right.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of
the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

24
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-12 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup
power
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

25
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

26
DBS3900
Installation Guide

configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configuratio
n
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30Hs
and
IBBS200D
10 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ts

27
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configuratio
n
s/
IBBS200Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
21 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30Hs
and
IBBS200D
s/
IBBS200Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:2
ratio
10 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ts
21 U
12 RRUs
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
BBU Installed in a TP48600A

The single-or dual-mode base station is configured with one BBU. A TP48600A provides power
to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements
are shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

28
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage
battery cabinet is configured initially
TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies
by customer space requirements and carrier configurations. These setups are shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

29
DBS3900
Installation Guide
with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio
by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

30
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

31
DBS3900
Installation Guide
configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A

32
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
configured
initially.
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS700Ds
/
IBBS700Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS300Ds
/
IBBS300Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/
IBBS300D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/
IBBS300D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS300Ds
/
IBBS300Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:2
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/
IBBS300Ds
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/
IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)

The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows:
l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is
installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment and BBU
1 is installed in the 2 U space under BBU 0.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of
the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When no storage battery cabinet is configured initially, the cabinet configurations of a triplemode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

33
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with 48 V 300
Ah backup power
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

34
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup
power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

35
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

36
DBS3900
Installation Guide
configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A

37
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
configured
initially.
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS700Ds
/
IBBS700Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS300Ds
/
IBBS300Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:1
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/
IBBS300D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/
IBBS300D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
TP48600As
and
IBBS300Ds
/
IBBS300Ts
initially
configured
on a 1:2
ratio
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/
IBBS300Ds
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/
IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)

When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB, one OMB can supply power only to one RRU.
RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel.
The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

38
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-23 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

Each OMB (Ver.C) configured in a DBS3900 can supply power to six RRUs. The RRUs can be
installed on a pole, wall, U-steel, or angle steel.
The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-24 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB
(Ver.C)
3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied
with DC power.
When the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power and the BBU is installed outdoors, the installation
scenarios of the BBU are listed in Table 3-8.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

39
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 3-8 BBU installation scenarios

Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
BBU Installed in a
TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.C)

TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies
TMC11H (Ver.B)

TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies
The same configuration

principles are used for the
DBS3900 of which the BBU
is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of
which the BBU is installed in
a TMC11H (Ver.C). For
details, see BBU Installed in
a TMC11H (Ver.B) or
TMC11H (Ver.C), which
uses a TMC11H (Ver.C) as
an example.
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

APM30H (Ver.B) supplied
with +24 V DC power and
RRUs are installed remotely.
The APM30H (Ver.B)
and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied
with +24 V DC Power
OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
and RRUs.
OMB (Ver.C)

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs
OMB (Ver.C) supplies

(Ver.C)
NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are referred to as TMC11H.
Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900

For details, see Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

40
DBS3900
Installation Guide
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

the TMC11H.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-25 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A single TMC11H can
provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs and support a maximum of 12 RRU power cables and
24 dual-wire fiber optic cables.
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations in the -48 V DC scenario.
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are
installed as follows:
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a
TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is
installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space).
41
DBS3900
Installation Guide
In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the
BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input).
Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space).
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is
installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode
base station are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show
the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Figure 3-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC
scenarios

base station are described in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
6U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two

DCDUs)

42
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
17 U
12 RRUs
2 TMC11H (with three

DCDUs: two DCDUs in a
TMC11H and one DCDU
in the other)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)

the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
Figure 3-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A single TMC11H can
provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs and support a maximum of 12 RRU power cables and
24 dual-wire fiber optic cables.
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations in the -48 V DC scenario.
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

43
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The principles for configuring a triple-mode or quadruple- base station are as follows:
l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured. BBU 0 is installed in the main TMC11H
cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H cabinet, which
is on the right.
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU
is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.

Figure 3-28 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC
scenarios

Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
18 U
12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power

When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC
power, this APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station are shown in the following figure and table.
Figure 3-29 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in +24 V DC scenarios
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

44
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
+24 V DC
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode

Figure 3-30 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in +24 V DC
scenarios

Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
+24 V DC
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)

In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB, an OMB supplies power to three RRUs, and the
RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel.
The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

45
DBS3900
Installation Guide
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB (Ver.C), an OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to six
RRUs, and the RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel.
The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is
(Ver.C)
3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with
AC power.
The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900
is supplied with AC power.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

46
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 3-15 Installation scenarios

BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely.
The IMB03 supplies power to the
BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
IFS06
The BBU is installed in an IMB03.

The IMB03 and RRUs are installed
in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR)

Installation Guide.

When external 110 V or 220 V AC power is provided, an AC/DC power device or ETP48100B1 is required to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-33 BBU installed in an IMB03 (without backup power)
The following table lists the cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an
IMB03 and there is no backup power.
Table 3-16 Cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 (without
backup power)
Power Supply
Cabinet and Module Configuration
110 V/220 V
1 IMB03+1 AC/DC power device+1 RRU

1 IMB03+1 ETP48100-B1+3 RRUs
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

47
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC
power.
The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900
is supplied with DC power.
Table 3-17 Installation scenario
BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
19-inch rack
19-inch racks consist of the INS12

rack provided by Huawei and the 19inch rack provided by the customer.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
The BBU and the DCDU-03B,

DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are
installed in a 19-inch rack indoors,
and the RRUs are remotely installed
outdoors. The DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
supplies power to the BBU and
outdoor RRUs.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Wall
The BBU and DCDU-03B,

DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are
installed on a wall indoors, and the
RRUs are remotely installed
outdoors. The DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
supplies power to the BBU and
outdoor RRUs.
BBU Installed on a Wall
Indoor
The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs

are remotely installed outdoors. The
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H
(Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)
supplies power only to the RRUs and
monitors only the RRUs.
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs

Installed Outdoors (Powered by
an APM30H)
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely
outdoors. The IMB03 supplies
The BBU is installed in an IMB03.

The IMB03 and RRUs are installed
in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR)

Installation Guide.

48
DBS3900
Installation Guide
BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
IBC10
The BBU is installed in an IBC10.

The DCDU-12C supplies power to
the BBU.
BBU Installed in an IBC10
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
can be installed in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario,
the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station.
Figure 3-34 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base
station configured with two BBUs. A triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station can also be
configured with one BBU, and the cabinet configurations in this scenario are the same as those
in the preceding figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

49
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 3-35 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station
BBU Installed on a Wall

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
can be installed indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario,
the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 3-36 BBU installed on a wall
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)

When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed
outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
or APM30H(Ver.D). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H(Ver.D) can be
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

50
DBS3900
Installation Guide
supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. The following figure shows the installation
scenarios.
Figure 3-37 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors

When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power
to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-38 BBU installed in an IMB03
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

51
DBS3900
Installation Guide
BBU Installed in an IBC10

When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IBC10, which supplies power
to the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-39 BBU installed in an IBC10
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

52
DBS3900
Installation Guide
4 Unpacking Check
Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
Context
CAUTION
The gravity center of some cabinets is in the front, for example, the BTS3900AL, IBBS700T
and IBBS300T . Therefore, avoid toppling of the cabinet when the door of the cabinet is opened,
especially when you unpack the cabinet or before it has been secured onto a base.
NOTICE
l Power on a cabinet or BBU within seven days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
NOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l
Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

53
DBS3900
Installation Guide
4 Unpacking Check
If...
Then...
The total number tallies with the packing

list
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with the

packing list
Find out the cause and report any missing

articles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.

If...
Then...
The outer packing case is intact
Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report the situation to
soaked
the local Huawei office.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If...
Then...
Types and quantity of the articles tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer.
those on the packing list
There are any goods missing, incorrectly
delivered, or damaged
Report the situation to the local Huawei office.
CAUTION
To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the
unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,
packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the
photos.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

54
DBS3900
Installation Guide
5 Obtaining the ESN
Obtaining the ESN
The electronic serial number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a NE. Record the ESN of the base
station before the installation for future commissioning.
Procedure
Step 1 Record the ESN on the BBU.
l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of the
BBU, as shown in Figure 5-1. Record the ESN and base station information.
l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 5-2. Remove the label and record the base station
information on the label printed with Site.
NOTE
The base station information includes the name, ID, and location of the base station.
Figure 5-1 ESN position (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

55
DBS3900
Installation Guide
5 Obtaining the ESN
Figure 5-2 ESN position (2)
Step 2 Report the ESN and base station information to the base station commissioning personnel or
remove the label and give it to the base station commissioning personnel.
NOTE
For base stations configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs and submit them to the
personnel responsible for the base station commissioning.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

56
6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D).
6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are
retained for cable layout and future maintenance.
6.2 Installation Process
The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the
cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations.
6.3 Installing a Cabinet
This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and
wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation
procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/
TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet.
6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06
When more than 12 RRUs are configured, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed to
supply power to the RRUs and distribute trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The ODM06D
or OFD06 can be installed on a pole or mounting frame.
6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet
A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets
to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D
This section describes how to install the PGND cable and equipotential cable. The PGND cable
connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of
the cabinet. The equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the
equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

57

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
6.7 Installing Mandatory Components

This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900.
6.8 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables
This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite.
6.9 Installing Cables
You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900
onsite.
6.10 Installation Checklist
After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.
6.11 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.
6.12 Subsequent Operations
This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which
include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

58

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Clearance Requirements for Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor

On a concrete floor, a cabinet can be stacked, or installed independently or side by side.
A minimum of 40 mm (1.57 in.) clearance and a maximum of 150 mm (5.91 in.) clearance are
required between two cabinets installed side by side. If a noise reduction module (NRM) is to
be installed, the minimum clearance between cabinets is 300 mm (11.81 in.).
The following figure shows clearance requirements for installing cabinets when a DBS3900 is
configured with cabinets such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Figure 6-1 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (1)
The following figure shows the installation clearances for the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and
IBBS300D/IBBS300T configured at a DBS3900 site.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

59
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
NOTE
If the site space is sufficient when an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is installed, the front doors of the cabinets are
preferentially aligned with each other. If the front doors of the cabinets cannot be aligned with each other due
to insufficient site space, the rears of the cabinets should be aligned with each other.
NOTE
l Only the APM30H and TMC11H can be installed on a pole or wall.

l When an APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with 15 RRUs, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed
and the ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on a pole.
Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Pole

The diameter of a pole for installing a single cabinet ranges from 60 mm (2.36 in.) to 114 mm
(4.49 in.). The recommended diameter is 80 mm (3.15 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a pole.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

60
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-4 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a pole
The ODM06D can be installed on a pole with a diameter ranging from 48 mm to 114 mm (1.89
in. to 4.49 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D on a pole.
Figure 6-5 Clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D on a pole
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

61
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
The OFD06 can be installed on a pole with a diameter ranging from 48 mm to 114 mm (1.89 in.
to 4.49 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on a pole.
Figure 6-6 Clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on a pole
Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Wall

The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a single cabinet on a wall.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

62
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-7 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a wall

The following figure shows the DBS3900 installation process.
NOTE
The procedure for installing an RRU is not described in this document. For details about how to install an
RRU, see the associated RRU installation guide according to the RRU model.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

63

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-8 Installation process

6.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor

This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor.
Installing the Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the base for a cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

64

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
For the procedure for installing the base for an IBBS700D/IBBS700T, see Installing the Base
in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.
Procedure
l
To install the base for an APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, perform
the following operations:
1.
Place the base on the correct position.

a.
Determine the position to install the cabinet according to the engineering drawing
and 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements.
b.
Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following
figure.
c.
After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape to measure
the distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.
Figure 6-9 Anchor points for the base
(1) Wall
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Installation holes
Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as

65
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
NOTICE
l Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the
dust before drilling holes.
l After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion
tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on
the concrete floor evenly and securely.
NOTE
In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a dent on the floor
before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy to drill.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
a.
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from
52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
b.
Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and
measure the distances between holes. If any of the hole is beyond the acceptable
range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.
c.
Tighten an expansion bolt slightly and place it vertically into each hole.
d.
Hit the expansion bolt with a rubber mallet until the expansion tube completely
enters the hole.
e.
Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring washer, and
flat washer.

66
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-10 Drilling a hole and inserting an expansion bolt assembly
(1) M12x60 bolt
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure.
a.
Place the base in the determined position on the concrete pad, using the expansion
tubes as reference.
b.
Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not tighten
them.

67

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-11 Installing the base in the correct position
4.
Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure.

a.
Place the level on the base and observe the position of the mercury.
b.
The base is horizontal only when the mercury is in the center of the level. Add
spacers between the base and the concrete pad to adjust the level if necessary.
Figure 6-12 Adjusting the base until it is horizontally level
(1) Levels
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spacer
Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in diagonally opposite sequence to
45 Nm (398.28 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
68

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-13 Tightening the bolts
6.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws from the front
cover panel of the base, and remove the cover panel, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Do not lose the removed screws and cover panel. They will be necessary later.
Figure 6-14 Removing the front cover plate
7.
Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the
following figure.
a.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M4 screw assemblies on both sides of

the base and remove the baffle plates.

69

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
b.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the rear
left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left. Then, remove the baffle
plates on the right one by one.
Figure 6-15 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base
Install the base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Install the base in the correct position.

a.
Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the engineering
drawing and 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements.
b.
Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following
figure.
c.
After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape to measure
the distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.

70

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Wall
2.
Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as
NOTICE
l Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the
dust before drilling holes.
l After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion
tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on
the concrete floor evenly and securely.
NOTE
In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a dent on the floor
before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy to drill.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

71

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
a.
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from
52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
b.
Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and
measure the distances between holes. If any of the hole is beyond the acceptable
range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.
c.
d.
Hit the expansion bolt with a rubber mallet until the expansion tube completely
enters the hole.
e.
Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring washer, and
flat washer.
(1) M12x60 bolt
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure.
a.
Place the base in the determined position on the concrete pad, using the expansion
tubes as reference.
b.
Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not tighten
them.

72
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-18 Installing the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T in the correct position
4.
Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure.

a.
b.
The base is horizontal only when the mercury is in the center of the level. Add
spacers between the base and the concrete pad to adjust the level if necessary.
Figure 6-19 Adjusting the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T until it is horizontally
level
(1) Levels
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spacer

73
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
5.
Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in diagonally opposite sequence to
Figure 6-20 Tightening the bolts on the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
6.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws from the front
cover panel of the base, and remove the cover panel, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Do not lose the removed screws and cover panel. They will be necessary later.
Figure 6-21 Removing the front cover plate from the base for the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

74

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
7.
Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the
following figure.
a.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M4 screw assemblies on both sides of

the base and remove the baffle plates.
b.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the rear
left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left. Then, remove the baffle
plates on the right one by one.
Figure 6-22 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base for
the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
----End
Installing the Cabinet on a Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a cabinet on a base.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The procedures for installing the APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and

IBBS300D/IBBS300T are the same. The following uses the APM30H as an example.
75

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
If the space is insufficient for you to install bolts at the bottom of the APM30H, remove
one or two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the cabinet and reinstall them
after the installation.
NOTE
The APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets are configured with air baffles. The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) series cabinets are configured with filler modules.
For how to install an IBBS700D/IBBS700T on a base, see Installing a Cabinet in

IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Lift the APM30H onto the base and align the bolt holes in the cabinet with those in the base, as
Figure 6-23 Lifting the APM30H cabinet onto the base
Step 2 Optional: Remove the one to two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the APM30H.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinet, as

76

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-24 Removing the air baffle
Remove one or two filler modules from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-25 Removing the filler module
Step 3 Use four M12x35 bolts to secure the APM30H cabinet onto the base, and use a torque wrench
to tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
If an IBBS300D/IBBS300T is installed on a base, the gasket with an oblong hole shown in the following figure
is not required.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

77

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-26 Securing the APM30H cabinet onto the base
(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof rubber foot (5) Gasket with an oblong
hole
Step 4 Optional: Reinstall the removed air baffles or filler modules. Secure the filler modules to 2 Nm
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Stacking Two Cabinets

This section describes the procedures and precautions for stacking two cabinets.
Context
The DBS3900 supports the following stacking scenarios: an APM30H or TMC11H stacked on
an IBBS200D/IBBS200T or IBBS300D/IBBS300T, an IBBS200D/IBBS200T stacked on
another IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and an IBBS300D/IBBS300T stacked on another IBBS300D/
IBBS300T.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the lower cabinet on the base. For detailed operations, see Installing the Cabinet on a
Base.
Step 2 Remove the cover plates from the cable holes at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

78
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-27 Removing the cover plates from the cable holes
Step 3 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-28 Removing the plastic screws
Step 4 Stack the cabinets and ensure that the installation holes on the upper cabinet are aligned with
the installation holes on the lower cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

79
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-29 Stacking the cabinets
Step 5 Use a torque wrench to secure the four M12x35 bolts inside the cabinet in diagonally opposite
sequence to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
If two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts stack on each other, the gasket with an oblong hole shown in the following
figure is not required.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

80

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
hole
----End
6.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the cabinet on a pole.
Context
l
The cabinet can be installed at a maximum height of 10 m (32.81 ft).
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 At an appropriate height on the pole, use four M12x180 bolts to secure a ladder-shaped bracket
onto the pole, and tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (398.28 lbfin.), as show in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

81

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-31 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket
(1) Attachment plate
(2) Ladder-shaped bracket
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Step 2 Remove the two plastic bolts at the rear top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-32 Removing the plastic bolts
Step 3 Install a bar at the top of the cabinet and use a socket wrench to tighten two M12x35 bolts on
the bar, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

82

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-33 Installing a bar
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

83

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 5 Place the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, use four M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet
onto the ladder-shaped bracket, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (398.28
lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-36 Securing the cabinet
(1) Gaskets with oblong holes
Step 6 Put an U-shaped bracket through the holes in the bar at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

84

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-37 Installing the U-shaped bracket
(1) Flat washer
(2) Spring washer
(3) Nut
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
6.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the cabinet on a wall.
Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to verify that the marking-off template
is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark six anchor points, as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

85
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-38 Marking the anchor points
(1) Anchor points
(2) Marking-off template
Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth of 55 mm (2.17 in.) to
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust
before drilling holes.
2.
Partially tighten expansion bolts and place them vertically into holes.
3.
Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion bolts until them go into the holes completely.
Then tighten the bolts.
4.
Remove the bolts, spring washers, and flat washers in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

86

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-39 Drilling holes and installing the expansion bolts
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Step 3 Align the ladder-shaped bracket with the four lower holes in the wall and use four M12x60 bolts
to tighten the ladder-shaped bracket to 45 Nm (398.28 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

87

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

88

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

89

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 8 Use two bolts to secure the bar on the cabinet onto the wall, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-46 Securing the bar
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

90

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

When more than 12 RRUs are configured, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed to
supply power to the RRUs and distribute trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The ODM06D
or OFD06 can be installed on a pole or mounting frame.
6.4.1 Installing an ODM06D/OFD06 on a Pole

This section describes the procedure for installing an ODM06D or OFD06 on an outdoor pole.
Context
The diameter of a pole for installing an ODM06D or OFD06 should range from 48 mm to 114
mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.).
An ODM06D is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following figure
Figure 6-47 Correct installation of an ODM06D
An OFD06 is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following figure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

91
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-48 Correct installation of an OFD06
NOTE
l The distance between the pole and the APM30H cabinet cannot exceed 2.5 m (8.2 ft). The maximum length
of the cable between an ODM06D and an APM30H is 6 m (19.69 ft).
l The procedures for installing an ODM06D and an OFD06 on poles are the same. This section describes the
procedure for installing an ODM06D on a pole.
Procedure
Step 1 Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as
Figure 6-49 Installing mounting ears
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

92

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Put the hose clamp through the holes in the middle of the mounting kit.
Step 3 Place the ODM06D to the installation position, circle the hose clamp around the pole, put the
steel strip of the hose clamp through the locking head, press the screw on a proper position to
partially tighten it, and use an M6 inner hexagon wrench to tighten the screw to 5 Nm (44.25
NOTE
When tightening the hose clamp, you need to be close to the ODM06D to prevent the ODM06D falling.
Figure 6-50 Tightening an ODM06D
----End
6.4.2 Installing the ODM06D/OFD06 on the Mounting Frame

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the ODM06D or OFD06 on
the mounting frame on the cabinet side.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
An ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet,
or two ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked
93
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
cabinets or both sides of a single cabinet. The ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frame can
be installed depending on site space and the number of ODM06Ds or OFD06s to be
installed.
l
An ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame or two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames are

preferentially installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an
ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame or two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames are installed
on the left side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets, only one ODM06D or OFD06 can
be installed one ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.
When the rack is installed on the left side of the cabinet and two modules are installed side
by side on the rack, the opening angle of the door cannot exceed 90 degrees.
Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet
or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet
Procedure
1.
Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-51 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.

94
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
3.
Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 Nm
(344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-53 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

95
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
4.
Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 Nm (344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-54 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame
(1)
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 Nm (344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.

96

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-55 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame

(2)
6.
Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on both

sides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on
the other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.
Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets

1.
Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
97
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
3.
Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 Nm
Figure 6-58 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

98

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
4.
Install mechanical parts used for carrying upper and lower supports on the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame, and use four M6X14 screws to tighten the mechanical parts
Figure 6-59 Install attachment plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
5.
Use four M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on
the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in Figure 6-60.
6.
Use three M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the
ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to 5 Nm (344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.

99
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-60 Tightening the second attachment plate (1)
7.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base

100
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-61 Tightening the second attachment plate (2)
Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.

101
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-62 Installing mounting ears
2.
Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06D
or OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.
Figure 6-63 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06
(1) Pre-securing part
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

102

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06
mounting frame to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.). This is a recommended tightening torque.
Figure 6-64 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06
----End
6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable

for a Cabinet
Context
The principles for grounding a DBS3900 site are as follows:
l
The stacked cabinets or side-by-side cabinets are connected using equipotential cables.
When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T is configured, the lower cabinets

are connected to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T under the primary
APM30H using equipotential cables.
When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T is configured, the IBBS200D/

IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T under the primary APM30H is connected to the external
ground bar using PGND cables. When an IBBS700D/IBBS700T is configured, the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the left of the primary APM30H is connected to the external
ground bar using PGND cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

103

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The following table lists the specifications of PGND cables and equipotential cables in the
APM30H series cabinets.
Table 6-1 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
PGND cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
l 220 V AC or -48 V DC
input: green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
l OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2) for the
stacked cabinets
Equipotenti
al cable
l 110 V AC input: green

and yellow

and yellow
l OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2) for the
cabinets installed
side by side
NOTE
The PGND cable is installed in the same way in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H
(Ver.D) series cabinets. This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

104
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
1.
Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 6-66 and Figure 6-67.
1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T under
the primary APM30H or in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the left of the APM30H, and
secure the OT terminal to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the ground busbar outside the cabinet.
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in Figure
6-65.
Figure 6-65 Installing an OT terminal correctly
Figure 6-66 Installing the PGND cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is configured)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

105
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
(1) Ground bar in the cabinet
(2) PGND cable
(3) External ground bar
Step 3 Install the equipotential cable, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

106
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-68 Installing the equipotential cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is configured)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Equipotential cable

107
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Step 4 Install the PGND cable and equipotential cable for the APM30H (Ver.B) +24 V cabinet, as
1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the cabinet under
the APM30H (Ver.B) +24 V cabinet, and secure the screws on the OT terminal to 4.8 Nm
(42.48 lbfin.). Then, connect the other end to the external ground bar.
2.
Install the equipotential cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

108
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-71 Installing a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
(1) Ground bar on the inner wall the cabinet
(2) PGND cable (3) Equipotential cable (4) Ground busbar
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to
bind them.
Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
hole on the cabinet.
Step 7 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.
----End
6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D

This section describes how to install the PGND cable and equipotential cable. The PGND cable
connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of
the cabinet. The equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable for an ODM06D.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

109
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Table 6-2 Specifications of the PGND cable

Cable
Application
Scenario
Size of the OT
Terminal and CrossSectional Area of the
Cable
Color
PGND cable
ODM06D
OT terminal (M6) at
one end connecting to a
cable with a crosssectional area of 16
mm2 (0.025 in.2) and
cord end terminal at the
other end
Green and yellow
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable.
1.
2.
Add an OT terminal and a cord end terminal at the ends of a PGND cable according to the
instructions in Installing the Cord End Terminal and Installing the OT Terminal.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Partially loosen the PG connector to route the cable through the PG connector.
2.
Route PGND cable for the ODM06D through the PG connector.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the terminal block.
4.
Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the screw on the cable clip to ensure that
the cable clip contact with the shield layer of the cable.
5.
Secure the PG connector of the cable.
NOTICE
Tighten the PG connector to waterproof the device.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

110

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-72 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D
Step 3 Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the ODM06D to the external ground bar.
----End

6.7.1 Installing the BBU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU.
Context
l
When the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H, TMC11H, or TP48600A, a maximum
of two BBUs are installed according to the onsite conditions. When the DBS3900 is
configured with the IMB03, OMB, or OMB (Ver.C), only one BBU is installed.
The following figure shows the positions for installing the BBUs when the DBS3900 is
configured with an APM30H (Ver.D).
NOTE
1. If two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment, they are installed in an APM30H and the
transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
2. During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the second BBU
is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

111

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-73 Positions for installing the BBUs
configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D).
NOTE
1. In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H
(with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H
(only providing transmission space).
2. In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is
installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The installation position of the BBU in the APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as that in the
APM30H (Ver.C), and the installation position of the BBU in the TMC11H (Ver.B) is the
same as that in the TMC11H (Ver.C), as shown in the following figure.

112

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) The BBU is installed in the APM30H.
(2) The BBU is installed in the TMC11H.
The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C),
or IMB03.
Figure 6-76 Installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the INS12.

113

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-77 Installation position of the BBU in the INS12
The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A.
Figure 6-78 Installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A
Procedure
Step 1 Install a BBU.
l When the BBU is installed in a TMC11H, OMB, or Indoor centralized support, check the
installation direction of the mounting ears for the BBU. If the mounting ears are installed in
standard mode, skip this step. If the mounting ears are installed reversely, reinstall them in
standard mode as follows:
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Remove the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure.

114

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-79 Removing the mounting ears on the BBU
2.
Remove the two ground screws, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-80 Removing the ground screws
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Reinstall the mounting ears in standard mode, as shown in the following figure.

115

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-81 Reinstalling the mounting ears in standard mode
Step 2 Optional: Install cable claws for the BBU in the APM30H or TMC11H.
Align a cable claw with the holes on one side of the BBU. Then use two M4 screws to secure
the cable claw to the BBU and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-82 Installing a cable claw on the BBU
Step 3 Slide the BBU into the cabinet, and tighten the four M6x16 screws on the panel of the BBU to
NOTICE
When installing a BBU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the BBU with your hands and
slide it into the cabinet slowly to prevent it from falling.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

116

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-83 Installing the BBU
----End
6.7.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit

When an outdoor base station transmits signals through an E1/T1 or FE/GE port, you need to
install the SLPU as a transmission signal protection unit.
Context
The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the fan assembly at the top of the APM30H,
TMC11H, or TP48600A.
Procedure
Step 1 Move the cable claws, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the SLPU.
2.
Place a cable claw between the mounting ear and the SLPU on each side, move the mounting
ear backwards by one hole, and align the mounting holes in the cable claw with those in
the mounting ear and the SLPU.
3.
Use the two removed M4 screws to secure the mounting ear and cable claw to the SLPU
and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

117

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-84 Moving the cable claw on the SLPU
Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two M6x12 screws
on the mounting ears to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-85 Installing the SLPU
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

118

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
6.8.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit

When an outdoor base station uses 1 to 16 customerized alarm inputs, you need to install the
SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit and its cables.
Context
l
The following table lists the specifications of the cables for the SLPU.
Table 6-3 Cable specifications
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable
External dry contact

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the step according to the types of the APM30H.
If...
Then...
An APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), or TMC11H

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
An APM30H(Ver.D) or TMC11H(Ver.D) is used
Go toStep 3.
Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler module, as
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.
2.
Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

NOTE
The removed filler modules must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top down.
If vacant slots are all occupied with filler modules, other redundant filler modules are discarded.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

119

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle, as shown in
NOTE
The removed air baffles must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top down. If
vacant slots are all occupied with air baffles, other redundant air baffles are discarded.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

120

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 6 Install the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the SLPU.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

121

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-90 Installing the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals
NOTE
A maximum of three surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals are installed according to
the actually customerized alarm inputs, as shown in the following figure. For details about the customerized
alarm inputs and cable connections, see section "Customized Alarm Input Principles" in the corresponding
hardware description.
Figure 6-91 Connections of the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals
Step 7 Install external dry contact monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Cut the external dry contact monitoring signal cable to the length suitable for the actual
cable route.
2.
Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the USLP2 to expose
the wires.
3.
Use a screwdriver to press the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP, insert the external dry contact
monitoring signal cables into the ports, and move the screwdriver away.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

122

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-92 Installing the external dry contact monitoring signal cable
Step 8 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable
ties to bind them.
Step 9 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
6.8.2 Installing the SOU

This section describes the procedure for installing the service outlet unit (SOU) and its power
cable when a DBS3900 is configured with an APM30H.
Context
There are four types of mounting brackets designed in different specifications and used in
different countries, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-93 Specifications of SOU mounting brackets
(1) British standard
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Universal
(3) American standard

(4) European standard
123
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Procedure
Step 1 Slide the SOU into the cabinet, and then tighten the four M6x12 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.),
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
The SOU is preferentially installed in the bottom 1 U space of the cabinet.
Figure 6-94 Installing the SOU
Step 2 Install the SOU power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the protective cover for the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack.
2.
Connect the C13 connector at one end of the SOU power cable to the power input port on
the SOU.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, and blue wires of the SOU power
cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack,
respectively. Connect the green and yellow wire of the SOU power cable to the PGND
terminal in the left mounting ear, and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
4.
Install the protective cover for the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack and the
AC baffle plate, and tighten the screws to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.)..
NOTE
The following figure describes the procedure for installing the SOU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.D).
The procedure for installing the SOU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) is the
same.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

124

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-95 Installing the SOU power cable
bind them.
----End
6.8.3 Installing the AC Heater

When the environmental temperature of a cabinet is low, the cabinet can be configured with a
heater so that the temperature in the cabinet is kept in a proper range. This section describes the
procedure for installing a heater in an APM30H or TMC11H.
Context
The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H
(Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D). The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). The figures in this section use the
APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) as examples.
If a service outlet unit (SOU) is not installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater in the 1U space
at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 6-96. If an SOU is installed in the cabinet, install
the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure 6-97.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

125

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-96 Position of the AC heater (1)
(2) SOU
(1) AC heater
Procedure
Step 1 Slide the AC heater into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten the four M6x12 screws
on the panel to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-98 Installing the AC heater
Step 2 Install the AC heater power cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

126

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
If...
Then...
The AC heater is installed in an APM30H
Perform Step 2.1
The AC heater is installed in a TMC11H
Perform Step 2.2
1.
Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H.

a.
Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.
b.
Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power cable to the power
input port on the AC heater.
c.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires
of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box,
respectively.
d.
Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on the cover plate
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Figure 6-99 Installing the AC heater power cable
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Install the AC heater power cable in the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-100 and Figure
6-101.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
To install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, do as follows:
Route the cables into the cabinet from the left side of the cabinet, connect the OT
127

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
terminals at one end of the cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in
the TMC11H and the other end of the cables to the external power equipment.
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Figure 6-100 Installing the heater power cables
Figure 6-101 Installing power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

128

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
6.8.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H

EMUA/EMUB and its cables.
Context
l
The EMUA/EMUB is installed in a reserved slot in the cabinet. In normal cases, it is

installed in the 1 U space under the installed devices in the cabinet.
The following table lists the specifications of the cables for the EMUA/EMUB.
Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
monitoring signal cable
Black
The figures showing how to install an EMUA are the same as those showing how to install
an EMUB. The following figures show how to install an EMUB.
Procedure
If...
Then...
An APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
An APM30H(Ver.D) is used
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

129

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
NOTE
Step 4 Optional: Align the cable claws with the holes of the mounting ears on the EMUB, and stick
the cable claws onto both sides of the EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If you want to
install an EMUA, skip this step.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

130

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-104 Sticking cable claws onto both sides of an EMUB
(1) Double-sided tape
Step 5 Install the EMUA/EMUB, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Slide the EMUA/EMUB into the installation position.
2.
Tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ear on both sides of the EMUA/EMUB to 2
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Figure 6-105 Installing the EMUA/EMUB
Step 6 Prepare the EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1.
Cut the power cable to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add the cord end terminal to one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
3.
Add the corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable
according to the type of the power equipment, as listed in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

131
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Table 6-5 Method of adding the connectors on the EMUA/EMUB power cable
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the cord end terminal at one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable to the PWR1
port on the EMUA/EMUB.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the corresponding power equipment, as listed in the
following table.
Table 6-6 Installation position of the EMUA/EMUB power cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
DC output terminal
LOAD7
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05

DC output terminal
LOAD4
132

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DC output fuse
terminal LOAD5
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
Figure 6-106 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable
3.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements, and use
cable ties to bind them.
4.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.
Step 8 Install the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS-485 port on the EMUA
or the COM_485 port on the EMUB.
2.
Connect the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the
PMU in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

133
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-107 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable
3.
4.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
6.8.5 Installing the DCDU-12B

You need to install the DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base station
configured only with RFUs.
Context
l
The following figure shows the position for installing the DCDU-12B in a cabinet.
Table 6-7 Position for installing the DCDU-12B
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Application Scenario
Installation Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D)
1 U space at the top of the

RFC
DBS3900
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D), 7 to 12
RRUs are installed in a
cabinet
Depending on site
requirements

134
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Base Station
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D), 7 to 12
cabinet
Figure 6-108 Position of a DCDU-12B
The following table lists the specifications of the DCDU-12B power cable.
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
BTS390
0A
(Ver.D)
AC
BTS390
0A
(Ver.D)
DC
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
NEG(-)
Blue
Grey
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
25 mm2
or 0.039
in.2, one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
OT
terminal
(M6)
l 35
mm2
or
0.05
4 in.
OT
terminal
(M6)
Dependi
ng on
the
external
equipme
nt
(low
smo
ke
zero
halo
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

135
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
NEG(-)
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
Blue
Grey
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
25 mm2
or 0.039
in.2, one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
OT
terminal
(M6)
l 35
mm2
or
0.05
4 in.
OT
terminal
(M6)
Dependi
ng on
the
external
equipme
nt
gen),
one
grou
p
l 16
mm2
or
0.02
5 in.
2,
two
grou
ps
DBS390
0
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Configu
red with
a
APM30
H
(Ver.D),
7 to 12
RRUs
are
installed
in a
cabinet
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
NEG(-)
Blue
Grey
Configu
red with
a
TMC11
H
(Ver.D),
7 to 12
RRUs
are
RTN(+)
Black
Blue

(low
smo
136
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
installed
in a
cabinet
NEG(-)
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
Blue
Grey
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
ke
zero
halo
gen),
one
grou
p
l 16
mm2
or
0.02
5 in.
2,
two
grou
ps
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws on both sides of the slot for installing the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-109 Installing a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

137
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Figure 6-110 Installing the DCDU-12B
(1) DCDU-12B
(2) Cable claw
Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable.

1.
Cut the cable to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add new connectors to both ends of the cable.

Table 6-9 Cable Connector
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Add new
connectors to both
ends of the power
cable according to
the instructions in
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable.
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
External power
equipment

Add new OT
terminals to one end
of the power cable
according to the
138
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
DBS3900
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D)
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
instructions in
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable. The
connector at the
other end depends
on the site
requirements.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable from the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input
terminals on the DCDU-12B, and tighten the screws on the DCDU-12B to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
2.
Reinstall the protective cover, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective
cover to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment,
as described in the following table.
Table 6-10 Cable Installation Position
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DC output terminal
RFC2 on the EPU in
the APM30H, and
tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.)
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
DC output terminal
RFC1 on the EPU in
the APM30H, and
tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.)
External power
equipment
Corresponding port
on the external
power equipment
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

139

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
DBS3900
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
Figure 6-111 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable
ties to bind them.
----End
6.8.6 Installing the GPS Surge Protector

The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for GPS signals.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

140

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that uses two satellite cards. To
install a satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-112 Removing the USCU
Step 2 Optional: Install a satellite card on the USCU, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the three M1.6 screws on the USCU.
2.
Place the satellite card on the USCU, aligning the mounting holes on the satellite card with
the bolts on the USCU.
3.
Use the three M1.6 screws removed in step a to secure the satellite card, and tighten the
screws to 0.1 Nm (0.89 1bfin.).
4.
Connect one end of the RF jumper for the satellite card to the RF port on the satellite card,
and connect the other end to the GPS port on the USCU.
NOTICE
There are six mounting holes on the satellite card, but you need to install only three screws, as
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

141
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-113 Installing a satellite card on the USCU
(1) Satellite card
(2) RF jumper for the satellite card
Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 Nm
(5.31 lbfin.).
Step 4 Secure the GPS clock signal cable onto the support, and tighten the screws to 6.5 Nm (57.53
lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

142

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-114 Securing the GPS clock signal cable onto the support
(1) GPS clock signal cable
(2) Support
Step 5 Secure the support onto the left inner wall of the cabinet, and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-115 Securing the support onto the cabinet
Step 6 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the LMPT, USCU, or UMPTa6, as shown
NOTE
If the BBU is configured with an LMPT or UMPTa6, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected
to the GPS port on the LMPT or UMPTa6.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

143

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-116 Connecting the GPS clock signal cable to the USCU
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support
Step 7 Use a torque wrench to secure the Protect port on the GPS surge protector onto the Type N50
straight female connector at one end of the GPS signal cable, and tighten the screw to 4 Nm
Figure 6-117 Installing the GPS surge protector
(1) GPS surge protector

NOTE
The exterior of the GPS surge protector in this section is for reference only. The actual exterior may be different.
Step 8 Use a torque wrench to secure the GPS jumper to the Surge port on the GPS surge protector,
and tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35.40 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

144

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-118 Installing the GPS jumper
ties to bind them.
----End
6.8.7 Installing the DDF

The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.
Context
l
The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.
In the following figure showing the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different
meanings.
a and b indicate signal cables.
s indicates a PGND cable.
Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are routed on the
right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.
The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When installing an E1
coaxial cable, install an insulating pad between the wiring terminal and the DDF.
Procedure
Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the BBU side. This twisted pair cable is connected
to the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

145

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding digital
distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.
2.
Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the terminal blocks on
the DDF, as shown in Figure 6-119.
Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the peer equipment side. This twisted pair cable
is connected to the peer equipment.
1.
2.
Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-119 Cabling on the DDF
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

146

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the DDF.
l When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to actual
situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same, as shown in Figure 6-119.
Step 4 Select the step according to the types of the cabinet.

If...
Then...
Go toStep 5.
An APM30H(Ver.D) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A) is used
Go toStep 6.
1.
2.

NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

147

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no, install the
floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack.
Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to tighten two
M6x12 screws on each side of the DDF to 2 Nm (17.70 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-122 Installing the DDF
----End
6.8.8 Installing storage batteries

This section describes the procedure for installing storage batteries in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T
and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Installing the Batteries

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the batteries and related cables
in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

148
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Prerequisites
A screwdriver and ESD gloves are available.
Before installing the storage battery, please check if the voltage of the storage battery is normal.
l
The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
Context
DANGER
l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power
cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and
negative poles of the batteries.
l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of batteries and to ensure
personal safety.
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing batteries in an IBBS200D or
IBBS200T. For the procedure for installing batteries in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T, see 21.4.5
Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User
Guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the power input and output switches for the batteries are turned off to avoid
overcurrent. The correct positions of the switches are shown by 1 and 2 in Figure 6-123.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

149

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-123 Power switches for a storage battery
(1) BAT circuit breaker on the panel of the EPU in the (2) BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on the
APM30H
power distribution box in the battery cabinet
Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in Figure
6-124.
NOTE
Slide the storage batteries along the guide rails into the cabinet so that some spacing remains between them.
Figure 6-124 Installing the storage batteries
Step 3 Install power cables for the new storage batteries, as shown in Figure 6-125.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

150
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
1.
Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.
2.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series connections.
3.
First connect the negative power cable and then the positive power cable for each storage
battery. Negative power cables are black, and positive power cables are red.
Figure 6-125 Installing power cables for the storage batteries
The following figure shows the route of power cables in the battery cabinet.
Figure 6-126 Route of power cables for storage batteries
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

151
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
----End
Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to install storage
batteries and the power cables in the battery cabinet (IBBS300D/IBBS300T).
Prerequisites
A screwdriver and ESD gloves are available.
l
Context
DANGER
personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the input and output power switches on the storage batteries has been turned off. If
the switches are turned on, an excessively large current may occur. The following figure shows
the positions of switches.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

152
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-127 Power switches for storage batteries
Step 2 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure.
NOTE
The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved between
the storage batteries.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

153
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-128 Installing storage batteries
Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the
DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the screw to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable
to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw.
2.
Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on the circuit breaker
in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on
the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.
NOTE
There are two types of screws for copper bars and wiring terminals on storage batteries, M6 and M8. They are
tightened to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.) and 14 Nm (123.90 lbfin.), respectively.
Figure 6-129 Installing power cables for storage batteries
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

154

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Install copper bars for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries.

Figure 6-130 Installing copper bars for storage batteries
Step 5 Close the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.
----End
6.8.9 Installing an HAU01A-01

This section describes the procedure for installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T
and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01 and its cables
in the IBBS700D.
Context
The mounting ears and M4 countersunk screws for the heater are placed in an accessory bag that
is located at the bottom of the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

155
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Procedure
Step 1 Use M4 countersunk screws to secure the mounting ears to the HAU01A-01, and then use an
M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-131 Installing the mounting ears
Step 2 Install the HAU01A-01 in the corresponding slot in the cabinet, and use an M6 torque
screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws on the HAU01A-01 to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

156

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-132 Installing the heater
Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws on the cover plate of the AC junction
box, and then open the cover plate.
2.
Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the AC_IN port
on the HAU01A-01.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, green and yellow wires of
the HAU01A-01 power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box,
respectively. Then use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
4.
Reinstall the cover plate of the junction box, and use an M3 torque screwdriver to tighten
the screws on the cover plate to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

157
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-133 Installing the HAU01A-01 power cable
Step 4 Install the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable.

1.
Connect the bare wires at the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the
ALM_ALL port on the HAU01A-01, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the IN0 port on the
CMUEA or CMUF before delivery.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

158
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-134 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable
2.
Optional: In the scenario where the battery cabinet is used with the BTS3900AL or
TP48600A-H17B1 and configured with a CCU, connect the RJ45 connector at the other
end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the HAU01A-01,
NOTE
One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the D_COM3 port on
the CCU before delivery.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

159

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-135 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable
ties to bind them.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01 and its cables
in the IBBS300D.
Context
The mounting ears and M4 recessed pan head screws of the heater are packed in an accessory
bag that is bound to the bottom of the cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Use M4 recessed pan head screws to install the sides of mounting ears with round holes on the
heater, and use an M4x8 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

160
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-136 Installing the mounting ears for the heater
Step 2 Install the heater on the front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

161

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-137 Installing the heater
Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plate of the AC junction
box. Then open the cover plate.
2.
Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the AC_IN port
on the heater.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires in the
HAU01A-01 power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use
an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and use an M3 torque screwdriver to tighten
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

162
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-138 Installing an HAU01A-01 Power Cable
Step 4 Install an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the
COM_IN port on the HAU01A-01.
2.
Connect the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the D_COM0 port on
the CCU01D-03.
Figure 6-139 Installing an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

163

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

onsite.
6.9.1 Cabling Requirements

Cables must be laid out according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal
interference.
NOTE
If a cable listed below is not required, skip the cabling requirements of the cable.
General Cabling Requirements

Bending radius requirements
l
The bending radius of a 7/8'' feeder must be greater than 250 mm (9.84 in.), and the bending
radius of a 5/4'' feeder must be greater than 380 mm (14.96 in.).
The bending radius of a 1/4'' jumper must be greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.). The bending
radius of a super-flexible 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 50 mm (1.97 in.), and the bending
radius of an ordinary 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 127 mm (5 in.).
The bending radius of a power cable or PGND cable must be at least three times its diameter.
The bending radius of a fiber optic cable is at least 20 times of its diameter, and the bending
radius of a breakout cable is at least 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The bending radius of an E1/T1 cable must be at least three times its diameter.
The bending radius of a signal cable must be at least five times its diameter.
Cable binding requirements

l
Cables of the same type must be bound together.
Different types of cables must be separately laid out and bound, with a minimum distance
of 30 mm (1.18 in.) from each other.
The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must not be damaged.
The cable ties must face the same direction, and those at the same horizontal line must be
in a straight line.
The excess of the indoor cable ties is cut off. The excess of 5 mm (0.197 in.) of the outdoor
cable ties is reserved, and the cut surfaces are smooth without sharp edges.
After cables are installed, labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables at their ends,
curves, and interconnection positions.
Security requirements
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

164

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
When routing cables, avoid sharp objects, for example sharp edges on the wall. If necessary,
use tubes to protect the cables.
When routing cables, keep the cables away from heat sources and use heat insulation
materials to insulate the cables from the heat sources.
Reserve a proper distance (0.1 m or 3.937 in. is recommended) between equipment and
cables especially at the cable curves to protect the cables and equipment.
Indoor cabling requirements

l
Route each cable into the room through the feeder window.
Reserve drip loops for all cables outside the feeder window before routing them into the
room. Ensure that the radiuses of the drip loops are greater than or equal to the minimum
bending radiuses of the cables.
When routing a cable into the room, ensure that a person is assisting you in the room.
Apply waterproof treatment to the feeder window.
Outdoor Cabling Requirements

l
Protect outdoor cables against potential damage. For example, put the cables through tubes.
The cables to be protected include AC power cables, transmission cables, and cables laid
out underground.
When routing cables through tubes on the ground below the cabinet, put a 30 mm to 50
mm (1.18 in. to 1.97 in.) length of the tubes into the base of the cabinet but do not put the
tubes into the cabinet. Use waterproof tape or waterproof silicon gel to block both ends of
the tubes and use sheet metal tabs to secure the tubes to the cable holes in the base.
When routing cables through tubes along a metal cable trough below the cabinet, do not
put the tubes into the base of the cabinet but cover the cable trough and connect the tubes
to the cable holes in the base.
Use clips to secure cables outdoors. For the method of installing a clip, see the installation
guide delivered with the clip.
Arrange cables neatly along the routing direction and use clips to secure the cables.
Determine the positions where the clips are installed according to the actual situation. For
example, 7/8" feeders are secured with clips at an interval of 1.5 m to 2 m (4.92 ft to 6.56
ft), CPRI fiber optic cables and power cables are secured with clips at an interval of 1 m
to 1.5 m (3.28 ft to 4.92 ft). Ensure that the clips are evenly spaced and in the same direction.
When fastening cables with a clip, ensure that the cables are aligned neatly and are routed
through the holes in the clip. Do not stretch the cables too tightly.
NOTE
There are two types of clips: 3-hole clip and 6-hole clip, which are described as follows:
l
A 3-hole clip is shown by illustration a in the following figure. It is often used to fasten feeders.
A 6-hole clip is shown by illustration b in the following figure. It is often used to fasten power cables and
CPRI fiber optic cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

165

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-140 Exterior of the clips
(1) Cable hole for feeders
(2) Cable hole for fiber optic cables
(3) Cable hole for power cables
The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray.

Figure 6-141 Cables secured on a cable tray
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
The following figure shows the cables secured on a tower.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

166

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-142 Cables secured on a tower
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Special Cabling Requirements

Cabling of power cables
l
Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design documents.
If the length of power cables is insufficient, replace the cables rather than adding connectors
or soldering joints to lengthen the cables.
Cables can only be laid out under well-planned instructions. The cabling activities of fiber
optic cables are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication facilities are
available.
Do not circle and twist cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

167

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
After routing a DC power cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along the shortest
path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the inside of the rails.
After routing a DC power cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips to secure the
power cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform. Ensure that there is no
excessively long distance between the equipment and the position where the power cable
is secured.
Cabling of PGND cables

l
PGND cables for a base station must be connected to the same group of ground bars.
PGND cables must be buried in the ground or routed indoors.
The external conductor of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded cable must
have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the equipment to which they are
connected.
PGND cables and signal cables must be installed separately. A certain distance must be
reserved between them to prevent interference from each other.
Switches or fuses must not be installed on the PGND cables.
Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables.
All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably connected to the ground
terminal.
Cabling of E1 cables
l
E1 cables must not cross power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables when laid out. If
transmission cables are laid out with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel,
the spacing between them must be greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
E1 cables are lined up straight and bound neatly with cable ties.
Sufficient slack is provided for E1 cables at turns.
E1 cables must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when routed, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-143 E1 cables routed in the cabinet
Cabling of fiber optic cables

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
At least three people are required for laying out fiber optic cables. The cabling activities
of fiber optic cables are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication
facilities are available.
168

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The operating temperature of fiber optic cables ranges from -40C to +60C (-40F to
+140F). If the actual temperature is beyond this range, take protective measures or select
another route.
Do not bind a fiber optic cable at the position where it bends.
Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on fiber optic cables. Keep the fiber optic
cables away from sharp objects.
When fiber optic cables are routed, the excess of the fiber optic cables must be coiled around
special devices, such as a fiber coiler.
An unarmored fiber optic cable must be bound using binding straps. If a fiber optic patch
cord needs to be secured in a cabinet or a piece of equipment, use binding straps to bind it
and then use cable ties to secure the binding straps to the cabinet or equipment. Ensure that
the fiber optic cables can flexibly move in the cable ties. Do not bend the fiber optic cables
sharply. The following figure shows how to bind the fiber optic cables correctly.
Figure 6-144 Binding fiber optic cables
When coiling fiber optic cables, apply even strength. Do not bend the fiber optic cables
with force.
Unused optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps.
The fiber optic cables must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when routed, as shown
in the following figures.
Figure 6-145 CPRI fiber optic cables routed in the cabinet (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

169

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-147 FE/GE fiber optic cables routed in the cabinet
After routing a fiber optic cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along the shortest
After routing a fiber optic cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips to secure the
fiber optic cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform. Ensure that there is no
excessively long distance between the equipment and the position where the cable is
secured.
Coil the excess of the fiber optic cables near the equipment on the tower before securing
the cables on the tower.
6.9.2 Cable Holes

The DBS3900 cabinets are maintained at the front of the cabinets. All cables for DBS3900
cabinets are routed into and out of the cabinets through the cable holes at the bottom of the
cabinets.
Cable Holes in the APM30H

The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

170
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-148 Planform for the cable holes in the APM30H
(1) Left cable hole
(2) Right cable hole
The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H.
Table 6-11 Cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H
Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: the APM30H input power cables,
equipotential cables between cabinets, power cables for the heating film in the
IBBS200D, power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H, CPRI fiber optic
cables, GPS clock signal cables, GPS jumpers, and monitoring signal cables for
the battery cabinet.
Right
cable hole
Used for routing the following cables: the RRU input power cables, power cables
for the battery cabinet, TMC11H input power cables, power cables for the fan
in the IBBS200D, power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T, E1/T1 cables,
FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU
monitoring signal cables.
Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the APM30H. This facilitates the routing of all types
of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

171

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-149 Cables holes in an APM30H
Cable Holes in a TMC11H

The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the TMC11H.
Figure 6-150 Planform for the cable holes in the TMC11H
(1) Left cable hole
The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

172

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 6-12 Cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H

Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: the TMC11H input power cables,
DCDU-12B input power cables, power cables for the junction box in the
TMC11H, power cables for the heating film in the IBBS200D, equipotential
cables between cabinets, monitoring signal cables between cascaded
CMUEAs (in different battery cabinets), CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock
signal cables, and GPS jumpers.
Right cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: the RRU power cables, monitoring
signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet
cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.
Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the TMC11H. This facilitates the routing of all types
of cables. The cable bags in the TMC11H are the same as those in the APM30H, as shown in
Figure 6-153.
Cable Holes in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T.
Figure 6-151 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(1) Left cable hole
The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

173

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 6-13 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: the input power cables, power cables
for the junction box, equipotential cables between cabinets, monitoring signal
cables between cascaded CMUEAs (in different battery cabinets), CPRI fiber
optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, and GPS jumpers.
Right cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: RRU input power cables, power cables
for the battery cabinet, input power cables, power cables for the fan in the
IBBS200D, power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T, monitoring signal
cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/
GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.
Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. This facilitates the routing
of all types of cables. The cable bags in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are the same as those in the
APM30H, as shown in Figure 6-153.

IBBS300T.
Figure 6-152 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

174

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Item
Description
Left
cable
hole
Used for routing the following cables: power cables for the AC junction box in
an TMC11H, equipotential cable between cabinets, heater power cables in an
IBBS300D, battery cabinet monitoring signal cables, and monitoring signal
cables between the cascaded CCU01D-03 modules (in different battery cabinets).
Right
cable
hole
Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: the TMC11H input power
cable, storage battery power cable, power cable for cascaded storage batteries,
power cable for the TEC in an IBBS300T, and power cable for the fan in an
IBBS300D.
of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Figure 6-153 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

175
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-154 Planform for the cable holes at the bottom of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T
(1) Left cable hole
Cable bags are used in the cable holes of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T. This facilitates the routing
of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Item
Note
Left
cable
hole
Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: PGND cable, power cable for
the AC junction box, power cable for the power distribution box, CCU monitoring
signal cable, and battery cabinet monitoring signal cable.

176

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Item
Note
Right
cable
hole
Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: power cable for the temperature
control system and power cables connected to the power distribution box.
6.9.3 Installing Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables.
Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H

In an APM30H (Ver.D), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the
APM30H (Ver.D) from the external power equipment.
Context
The APM30H supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC duallive-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power cables for the APM30H,
as listed in the following table.
Table 6-16 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
L3
Gray
Blue
EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05
power cables in a 220 V AC
single-phase scenario
Brown
Blue
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
dual-live-wire scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
White
three-phase scenario
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

177

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased
locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l Determine whether to install a polyethylene (PE) wire based on local regulations.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables.
1.
2.
Add M6 OT terminals to the cables on the EPU side according to the instructions in
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables, as shown in Figure 6-156, Figure
6-157, or Figure 6-158.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2.
Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar
from the L1, L2, and L3 AC input terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110
V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3.
Route the power cables into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, connect
each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
4.
Install the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.25 Nm (2.21
lbfin.).
Figure 6-156 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC three-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

178

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-157 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC single-phase)
Figure 6-158 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (110 V AC dual-live-wire)
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU-12C power cables and
the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from
the APM30H into the TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

179

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 6-17 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable
DCDU-12C
power cables
Power cables for

the AC junction
box in the
TMC11H
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN
(+)
Black
EPC4 connector
OT terminal (M6, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
Blue
Brown
Blue
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
OT terminal (M4, 1.5

mm2 or 0.002 in.2)
NOTE
The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally,
the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the DCDU-12C power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the
TMC11H.
1.
2.
Add a connector or terminals to each end of the input power cables for the TMC11H and
the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H according to Table 6-17. For
details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4
Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12C power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the DCDU-12C power cables to the RTN(+) and
NEG(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT
terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the DCDU-12C power cables to the LOAD7
port on the EPU in the APM30H.
4.
Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw on the
protective cover to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
CAUTION
Ensure that the TMC11H power cable for a TMC11H added to a running base station must be
connected to the TMC11H first and then to the APM30H. The operations in the reverse sequence
may cause component damage or personal injury.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

180
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-159 Installing the DCDU-12C power cables
Step 3 Install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the L3 and N3 terminals in the
AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 Nm
(14.16 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in
the AC junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6
Nm (14.16 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

181

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T consist of the power cables for
the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, fan power cables in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cables in
the IBBS200D, and TEC power cables in the IBBS200T.
Context
A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

182

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 6-18 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D
Cable
Color
One End
OT terminals (M8, 35 mm2 or

0.054 in.2) (3634)
Power cables for

the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Fan power cables

in an IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Brown
Blue
TEC power
cables in an
IBBS200T
(Optional)
heating-film
power cables in
the IBBS200D
The Other
End
EPC4 connector
OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or

0.002 in.2)
NOTE
l The method of installing the TEC power cables in the IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing
the fan power cables in the IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the fan power
cables in the IBBS200D as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
1.
Cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to Table 6-18. For
detailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable and
Step 2 Install the power cables for an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals labeled BAT in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals labeled BAT on the EPU in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT
terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
4.
Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.3
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

183
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-161 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Step 3 Install the fan power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the power cables to the INPUT port labeled FAN/TEC in the power
distribution box in the IBBS200D.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the LOAD8 port on the EPU in the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

184
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-162 Installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D
Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
Connect one end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC junction box
on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6
Nm (14.16 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the heating-film AC
junction box on the left inner wall in the IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws on the OT
4.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

185

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-163 Installing the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D
(1) AC junction box
(2) Heating-film AC junction box
CAUTION
When connecting the heating-film power cables to the heating-film AC junction box in the
IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manners shown in Figure 6-164.
l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-film AC
junction box.
l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from
the top, not from the bottom.
Figure 6-164 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the heating-film AC
junction box in the IBBS200D
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

186
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, fan
power cables in the IBBS200D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film
power cables in the IBBS200Ds, TEC power cables in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cables
between cascaded IBBS200Ts.
Context
or IBBS200T.
Table 6-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable
One End
OT terminals (M8, 35 mm2 or 0.054

in.2) (3634)
Power cables for

the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Fan power cables

in an IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
RTN(+)
Black
TEC power
cables in an
IBBS200T
Fan power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Color
The Other End
OT terminals (M8, 35 mm2 or 0.054

in.2) (3634)
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector

187

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Color
TEC power
cables between
cascaded
IBBS200Ts
NEG(-)
Blue
(Optional)
heating-film
power cable in
the IBBS200D
Brown
Blue
One End
The Other End
OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or 0.002

in.2)
NOTE
l The method of installing the TEC power cables in the IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing
the fan power cables in the IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the fan power
cables in the IBBS200D as an example.
l The method of installing the cascading TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts is the same
as the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds. This section describes
the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds as an example.
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
2.
Connect one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT in
the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten
the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled
BAT on the EPU in the APM30H.
4.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

188

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
Connect each end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT
in the lower part of the power distribution boxes in the cascaded IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
3.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

189
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-166 Installing the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Step 4 Install the fan power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the power cables to the INPUT port labeled FAN/TEC in the power
distribution box in the IBBS200D.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

190
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-167 Installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D
Step 5 Install the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the power cables to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen
in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen
in the power distribution box in the other IBBS200D.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

191
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-168 Installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds
Step 6 Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Connect one end of the heating-film power cables to the L2, N2, L1, and N1 terminals in
the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the
OT terminals to 1.6 Nm (14.61 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the heating-film AC
junction boxes on the left inner wall in the IBBS200Ds. Then tighten the screws on the OT
4.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

192

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-169 Installing the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds
(1) AC junction box
CAUTION
When connecting the heating-film power cables to the heating-film AC junction box in the
IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manners shown in Figure 6-170.
junction box.
l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

193
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T consist of the power cables for
the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, fan power
cables in the IBBS300D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, TEC power cables
in the IBBS300T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T.
Table 6-20 Specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Cable
Color
One End
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black

0.054 in.2) (3634)
Power cables RTN(+)

for the fan in
an
IBBS300D,
fan power
cables
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ds,
power cables
for the TEC in
Black
IBBS300D/
IBBS300T
power cables
and power
cables
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
OT terminal
(M4, 2.5
mm2 or
0.004 in.2)

The Other
End
EPC4
connector
194

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Color
an IBBS300T,
and TEC
power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ts
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable
for the AC
junction box
(optional) and
cascading
power cable
for the AC
junction box
(optional)
Brown
Blue
One End
The Other
End

0.002 in.2)
NOTE
l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS300T is the same as the method of
installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D. This section describes the method of installing
the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D as an example.
l The method of installing the TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ts is the same as the method
of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds. This section describes the method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
1.
2.
Step 2 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

195

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black negative power cable to the NEG(-)
terminal in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black negative power cable to the NEG(-)
terminal in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
3.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+) terminal
in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then
tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
4.
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+)
terminal in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Figure 6-171 Installing power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
Step 3 Install the power cables for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black negative power cable to the terminal labeled
NEG(-) in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then
tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+) terminal
in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten
the screws on the OT terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the battery power port on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8
Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

196

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-172 Installing power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEGon the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction
box in the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the DC output port
LOAD8 on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

197

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-173 Installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D
1.
box, respectively, in the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39
lbfin.).
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled
NEG- on the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC
junction box, respectively, in the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm
(12.39 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

198
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-174 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds
Step 6 Optional: Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the L and N terminals
in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm
(12.39 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals
in the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then, tighten the screws to
1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to tighten
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

199

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-175 Installing power cables for AC junction boxes
Step 7 Optional: Install the cascading power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the
L1, N1, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the basic IBBS300D/IBBS300T and
use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires
to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the extension IBBS300D/IBBS300T
and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

200

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-176 Installing the cascading power cable for AC junction boxes
bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, the power cable for an AC junction box, the power cable for the
temperature control system.
Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

201

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IBBS700T.
Table 6-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Cable
Color
One End

0.054 in.2) (3634)
Power cables for

the IBBS700D or
IBBS700T
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cable for

the temperature
control system
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

an AC junction
box
Brown
Blue
The Other
End
EPC4 connector

0.002 in.2)
NOTE
Colors and structures of cables vary in different regions. If cables are purchased at local markets, they must
comply with local rules and regulations.
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+)_1 and NEG(-)_1
terminals in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals labeled BAT on the EPU in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT
terminals to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
4.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

202

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Install the power cable for the temperature control system in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as
1.
Connect one end of the power cables to the DC INPUT port in the power distribution box
in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

203

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-178 Installing the power cable for the temperature control system in the IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
Step 4 Optional: Install the power cable for an AC junction box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as
1.
2.
Connect one end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC junction box
on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6
Nm (14.16 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box
in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 Nm
(14.16 lbfin.).
4.
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

204

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-179 Installing the power cable for an AC junction box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T
(1) AC junction box
bind them.
----End
Installing BBU Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU power cables.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

205
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Table 6-22 Specifications of a BBU power cable

Cable
BBU power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
Black
EPC4 connector
3V3 connector
NEG(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to one end of each BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the
EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU
in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Step 3 Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD0 port on
the EPU, as shown in the following figure.
CAUTION
Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected
to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may
cause component damage or personal injury.
NOTE
When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by
using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connector at one end of the second BBU power cable is connected to
the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector at the other end is connected to the LOAD1 port on
the EPU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

206

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-180 Installing BBU power cables
Step 4 Optional: Install the power cable for the second BBU, as shown in Figure 6-180.
1.
Prepare the BBU power cable following the operations in Step 1.
2.
Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU.
3.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD6 port
on the EPU.
bind them.
----End
Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of Less Than or Equal to 12 RRUs

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power cables.
Context
A maximum of 12 RRU power cables can be installed in an APM30H.
An RRU power cable feeds DC power into an RRU. The following table lists the specifications
of an RRU power cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

207

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 6-23 Specifications of an RRU power cable

Cable
RRU power
cable
RTN(+)
Color
One End
The Other End
Black (North
American)
EPC5 connector
Depending on the port on

the RRU
Brown
(European )
NEG(-)
Blue
NOTE
l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the RRU. For
details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Relocate the ground clips, as shown in Figure 6-182.
NOTE
When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the ground clips in the APM30H must be
relocated to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
1.
Remove the two nuts securing the two PGND cables on which the two ground clips are
installed from the inner right side of the APM30H. Then remove the two ground clips.
2.
Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the inner right
side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the ground clips to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the ground
screw, as shown by illustration 1 in the following figure.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of the
ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables
through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through one
ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips and
comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five cables
through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 4 in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

208

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-181 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)
Figure 6-182 Relocating the ground clips
Step 2 Route the RRU power cable into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the right cable bag.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Route the RRU power cable into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the right cable bag,
and strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.)
away from the cable bag to expose the shield layer.
209

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
If the RRU power cable is routed into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the left cable bag, strip
a length of jacket off the RRU power cable immediately after routing it into the cabinet to expose
the shield layer.
2.
Strip the shield layer off the RRU power cable to expose the two wires at the position 350
mm (13.78 in.) away from the cable bag for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
3.
Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.
Figure 6-183 Installing the ground clip
Step 4 Add an EPC5 connector to the RRU power cable on the EPU or DCDU-12B side according to
the instructions in Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.
CAUTION
Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected
to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

210

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 6 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cable to one of the RRU0 to
RRU5 ports on the EPU or one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown
NOTE
RRU power cables are routed into the APM30H through the right cable bag in preference. If the space in the
right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power cables through the left cable bag.
Figure 6-184 Installing RRU power cables
bind them.
----End
Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of More Than 12 RRUs

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

211

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
When more than 12 RRUs are configured for an APM30H, the cable bag in the APM30H
supports nine groups of RRU power cables with a maximum cross-sectional area of 8.2 mm2
(0.013 2) of each RRU power cable, three groups of RRU power cables with a maximum crosssectional area of 4 mm2 (0.006 2) of each RRU power cable, and one group of ODM power
cables feeding power into three RRUs.
of RRU power cables.
Table 6-24 Specifications of RRU power cables
Cable
ODM06D
power cable
RRU power
cable
Wire Color
One End
The Other End
RTN
(+)
wire
Brown
Cord end
terminal
OT terminal (M6)
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
RTN
(+)
wire
Black (North
American standards)
EPC5
connector
Depending on the port

on the RRU
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
Brown (European
standards)
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cables through the cable bag in an APM30H according to operations from
Step 1 to Step 6 in Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of Less Than or Equal to 12
RRUs.
NOTE
This section describes the procedure for installing RRU power cables that are routed out of an ODM06D.
Step 2 Route the ODM06D power cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the left side of the
cabinet from top to bottom.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

212

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
l If 12 groups of RRU power cables have been installed, the ODM power cable only can be
routed from top to bottom. When the space in the cable bag is insufficient, the bottom of the
cable bag is easily damaged if the ODM power cable is routed from bottom to top.
l Before routing the ODM power cable from top down, you must bind all other installed cables
to prevent them from being affected by the ODM power cable.
Step 3 Install the ground clip for the ODM06D power cable on the APM30H side.
1.
Use a utility knife to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the power cable to expose the
shield layer.
Figure 6-185 Stripping the jacket off the power cable
2.
Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of the power cable, and
use the cable tie to bind the copper sheet tightly. Then cut the excess cable tie from the
head without leaving any sharp edge.
Figure 6-186 Wrapping and tying the copper sheet of the ground clip
(1) Hole for a cable tie (12 AWG/4 mm2 [0.006 in.2]) (2) Hole for a cable tie ( 6 mm2 [0.009 in.2])
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

213

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation tape around the ground
clip.
Figure 6-187 Wrapping the waterproof tape and insulation tape
(1) Waterproof tape
(2) Insulation tape
(3) Cable tie
(4) Power cable
(5) PGND cable
NOTE
l Cut the cable tie at a position 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.20 in.) away from the stub of binding
strap.
l An M8 OT terminal is installed at the end of ground clip connecting to the ground by default.
The M8 OT terminal needs to be replaced by an M6 OT terminal onsite. For detailed operations,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
4.
Install the OT terminal at one end of the ground clip on the ground terminal on the left side
of the cabinet, and tighten the terminal to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Step 4 Add the cord end terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the ODM side according to the
Step 5 Open the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the three screws on the cover for the ODM06D, and
then open the cover.
2.
Open the protective cover.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

214
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-188 Opening the cover for the ODM06D
Step 6 Prepare the cable according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 7 Install the RRU power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the cable clip.

NOTE
The screw on the cable clip can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2.
Partially loosen the PG connector to route the cable through the PG connector.
3.
Route the RRU power cable through the PG connector.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the terminal block.
5.
Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the screw on the cable clip to ensure that
the cable clip contact with the shield layer of the cable.
6.
Secure the PG connector of the cable.
NOTICE
Tighten the PG connector to waterproof the device.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

215

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-189 Installing RRU Cables
(1) RRU power cable
(2) ODM06D power cable
Step 8 Close the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Close the protective cover.
2.
Close the cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the three screws on the cover.
Figure 6-190 Closing the cover for the ODM06D
Step 9 Connect the ODM06D power cable to the DCDU-12B in an APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

216

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Add the OT terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the cabinet side according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
Verify that the circuit breakers on the RRUs connecting to the ODM06D are turned off.
3.
Optional: If 3 RRUs are added to 12 RRUs, set RFC1 breaker in the APM30H to OFF.
4.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminals RTN
(+) and NEG(-) on the DCDU-12B in the APM30H.
Figure 6-191 Installing the ODM06D power cable
5.
Optional: Set RFC1 breaker in the APM30H to ON.
bind them.
----End
6.9.4 Installing Transmission Cables

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing transmission cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

217

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the E1/T1 surge protection
transfer cable.
Context
l
The following figure shows a GU base station using separate transmission. For cable
connections for the E1/T1 surge protection transfer in other types of base stations, see
section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable are the
same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses
the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 connectors at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the E1/
T1 ports on the GTMU/UTRP/WMPT/UMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the plastic screws
on the connectors to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-192 Installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Step 2 Connect the DB25 connectors at the other end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to
the INSIDE ports on the UELP in the SLPU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors
to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the preceding figure.
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

218
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
----End
Installing the E1/T1 Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cables.
Prerequisites
NOTICE
Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then, solder a
connector to each E1/T1 cable during the same session.
Context
l
The following figure shows a GU base station using independent transmission. For the E1/
T1 cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable
Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 cable are the same in the APM30H
(Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D)
as an example.
The E1/T1 cable on the SLPU side is routed along the left side of the cabinet interior.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an OUTSIDE port on the UELP, and
tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

219

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-193 Installing the E1/T1 cable
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom
left of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment.
bind them.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the FE/GE surge protection
transfer cable.
Context
l
The following figure shows a GL base station using separate transmission. For cable
connections for the FE/GE surge protection transfer in other types of base stations, see
The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable are the
same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to an FE
electrical port on the GTMU/WMPT/UMPT/LMPT, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

220

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-194 Installing the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable
Step 2 Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near
the INSIDE on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 6-194.
bind them.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Context
l
An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.
When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T, ensure that the ground clip
has been moved from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T before installing the FE/
GE Ethernet cable.
The following figure shows a GL base station using separate transmission. For the FE/GE
Ethernet cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable
The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE Ethernet cable are the same in the
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the
APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag or a cable outlet module into the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

221
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)

1.
At a position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet
or within 1 m (3.28 in.) away from the cable hole on APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B)
cabinet, strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose
the shield layer.
2.
Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer
securely contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near the OUTSIDE
silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

222

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-196 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Step 4 Connect the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the external transmission equipment.
bind them.
----End
Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
Context
l
The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.
The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

223

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not
used simultaneously.
The connections and routing of FE/GE fiber optic cables in APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H
(Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D) are the same. This section describes the connections and
routing of the FE/GE fiber optic cables in the APM30H (Ver.D).
NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 6-197 and Figure 6-198.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
board in the BBU.
2.
Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3.
Lower the puller of the optical module.
4.
Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.
5.
Raise the puller of the optical module.
Figure 6-197 Removing the dustproof cap from the port
Figure 6-198 Installing the optical module
Step 2 Install the fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 6-199 and Figure 6-200.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

224

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber
optic cables, and insert the connectors into the optical module on the BBU.
2.
Route the fiber optic cables out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the cabinet.
3.
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cables to the external transmission equipment.
NOTICE
The TX and RX ports (FE/GE optical ports) on the BBU must be connected to the RX and
TX ports on the transmission equipment, respectively.
Figure 6-199 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Figure 6-200 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

225

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End
6.9.5 Installing Signal Cables

This chapter describes the procedures and precautions for the installing signal cables in a cabinet
or between cabinets.
Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion
of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
When a base station is configured with one APM30H, one monitoring signal cable must
be installed onsite.
If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure,
another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
Figure 6-201 1 APM30H expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUEA in the fan assembly.
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on
the UPEU in the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

226
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-202 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H
Step 2 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, install another CMUEA-BBU
monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
CMUEA in the fan assembly of the added TMC11H.
2.
the UPEU in the BBU of the APM30H.
Figure 6-203 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the TMC11H
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

227

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Context
NOTE
l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two monitoring signal
cables must be installed onsite.
l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, as shown in
Figure 6-204, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
l When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the
APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
Figure 6-204 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/

IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
228
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
2.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on
the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

229
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-206 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T (2)
Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, another

CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added TMC11H must
be added, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the added
TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

230

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 1 APM30H+2

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 1 APM30H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Context
NOTE
l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three monitoring signal
l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

231

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-208 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

232

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Figure 6-210 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs in the two IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE on
the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE
on the door of the second IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

233
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-211 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs in the two
IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, another

be installed, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

234

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-212 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the TMC11H
bind them.
----End
Scenario of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts and Its Expansion Scenario

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts to 1 APM30H+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.
Context
NOTE
l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, three monitoring signal
l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in
Figure 6-213, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

235

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-213 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

236

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the
IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
Figure 6-215 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the configuration of 1 APM30H+1

IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for CCU01D-03 modules between cascaded IBBS300Ds/
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the
left IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CCU01D-03 on the door
of the right IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

237
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)

IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, another

1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

238

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

239
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Context
NOTE
l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T, two monitoring signal
l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H, as shown in
Figure 6-218 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/

IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

240
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

241
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-220 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS700D or
IBBS700T
Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H, another

1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

242

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
bind them.
----End
(Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables

This section describes how to install an inter-BBU signal cable for a triple- or single-mode base
station.
Prerequisites
l
A new BBU has been added.
Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following
requirements are available:
The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.
The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

243

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is labeled
as MM.
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module
is black or gray.
l Figure 6-222 shows the label on an optical module.
Figure 6-222 Label on an optical module
(1) Maximum rate
(2) Wavelength
(3) Transmission mode
Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.
Table 6-25 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects
two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to
the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

244

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the optical
modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the port.
3.
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 6-224.
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The following
figure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U
mode.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.
245

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.
Step 4 Optional: Install an inter-BBU signal cable between the WBBPf boards in the two BBUs, as
shown in the following figure. This cable is required only when baseband interconnection is
supported.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE
l If the two BBUs are installed in the APM30H by referring to Figure 6-225. If BBU0 is installed in the
APM30H and BBU1 in the TMC11H by referring to Figure 6-226.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same
type as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A
and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
Figure 6-225 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

246

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch
cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU
interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used
as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
----End
Installing a BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits the alarm signals from external alarm devices to the BBU.
Procedure
Step 1 Install a BBU alarm cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the EXT-ALM0/EXTALM1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
2.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the external alarm device.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

247

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-227 Installing the BBU alarm cable
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind it.
Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
Installing an ODM06D Surge Protection Alarm Cable

An ODM06D surge protection alarm cable transmits information about the surge protection box
in an ODM06D to a central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA).
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable.
1.
Cut off the RJ45 connectors on both ends of the network cable, and cut the power cable to
a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Strip the sheath of 7 mm (0.28 in.) off the network cable at both ends, and three pairs of
wires in the twisted pair that are exposed.
NOTICE
When stripping the jacket off a twisted pair to expose the shield layer, do not scratch the
insulation layer of wires in the twisted pair.
Step 2 Install the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable, a shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable with the bare wire to the
IN0 port on the central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) in the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable with the bare wire to
the surge protector in the ODM06D.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

248

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-228 Installing an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable
bind them.
----End
6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less than or

Equal to 12 RRUs
CPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

249

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
NOTE
l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is labeled as MM.
l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is
black or gray.
l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
l For details about the CPRI fiber optic cable connections, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in
3900 Series Base Station Cables.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install optical module in the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-229 and Figure 6-230.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the optical module into a CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, or LBBP.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

250

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Install fiber optic cables on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-231 and Figure 6-232.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber
optic cables.
2.
Insert the connectors into the optical module in the BBU.
Figure 6-232 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cables
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cables along the left side of the cabinet through the cable bag on the
bottom left side of the cabinet, and to the corresponding RRUs.
Step 4 Install the same type of optical modules in both the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end
labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optic cables to the optical module in the RRU side. For details
about how to install the optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU side, see the
related RRU installation guide.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

251

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on the BBU
side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected
to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively.
bind them.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
6.9.7 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of More Than 12

RRUs
A CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between a BBU and an RRU.
Context
NOTE
l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled as MM.
black or gray.
l Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
l When more than 12 RRUs are configured, you can use a CPRI fiber optic cable to connect a BBU to
an RRU according to the instructions in 6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less
than or Equal to 12 RRUs.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

252

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
When installing a single-core bi-directional fiber optic cable for the RRU3804 or RRU3806,
pay attention to the following:
l
The single-core bi-directional optical module must be used in pairs. Therefore, the singlecore bi-directional optical modules used in the BBU must match those used in the RRUs.
The rate of a single-core bi-directional optical module supported by the single-core bidirectional fiber optic cable is 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
When installing a fiber optic cable, split the DLC connector at each side into two LC
connectors, and connect only one LC connector at each end of the fiber optic cable. The
other LC connector at each end of the fiber optic cable can be left idle on the equipment
side or cut off.
Procedure
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, or LBBP in
the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 6-234 Installing an optical module
Step 2 Layer 12 CPRI fiber optic cables hierarchically and wrap the CPRI fiber optic cables with
winding plastic tape, as showing in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

253
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
NOTE
Wrap the end of the fiber optic cable with a winding pipe and then wrap it with a tape to avoid dropping of the
protective caps.
Figure 6-235 Wrapping CPRI fiber optic cables with winding plastic tape
Step 3 Route the OFD trunk fiber optic cable into the cabinet through the cable bag on the left side of
the cabinet, and remove the winding plastic tape after the trunk fiber optic cable is routed into
the cabinet.
Step 4 Install the OFD trunk fiber optic cable on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-236 and Figure
6-237.
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 0A and 0B to 5A to 5B
on the fiber optic cables.
2.
Insert the connector into the optical module in the BBU.
Figure 6-236 Removing dust-proof caps from the fiber optic cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

254
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-237 Installing a CPRI fiber optic cable
NOTE
When putting fiber optic cables through the PG connector of an OFD06D, put them through it one by one rather
than all together.
Step 5 Install the OFD trunk fiber optic cable on the OFD06D.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Remove the cover from the OFD06, remove the M20 PG connector from the cable hole on
the right side of the OFD06, and remove the rubber plug inside, as shown in the following
figure.

255

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-238 Removing a rubber plug
2.
Insert the PG connector and the removed rubber plug onto the fiber optic cable, and route
the fiber optic cable through the cable hole on the right side.
3.
Insert the six DLC connectors on the trunk fiber optic cable into the six SFP ports facing
upwards in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
If the fiber optic cable in the OFD06 is excessively long, wind the fiber optic cable for some circles
to ensure the convenient connection between the fiber optic cable and ports.
Figure 6-239 Installing the trunk fiber optic cable
4.
Remove the M32 PG connectors in the two cable holes on the left side and remove the
rubber plugs inside.
5.
Put the PG connectors onto the three breakout fiber optic cables, pull apart the holes in the
rubber plug, and insert the breakout fiber optic cables into the holes, as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

256

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-240 Holes in the rubber plug
6.
Insert the two rubber plugs into the two cable holes on the left side of the OFD06.
7.
Insert the six DLC connectors on the breakout fiber optic cables into the six SFP ports
facing downwards in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
If the fiber optic cable in the OFD06 is excessively long, wind the fiber optic cable for some circles
to ensure the convenient connection between the fiber optic cable and ports.
Figure 6-241 Installing the breakout fiber optic cables
8.
Use a cable tie to bind the trunk fiber optic cable with a diameter of 7.5 mm (0.30 in.) onto
the cable trough in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure.
NOTICE
Do not bind any trunk fiber optic cables with a diameter of 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) or any pigtails.
Otherwise, fiber optic cables may be broken with great force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

257

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Cable trough
9.
Tighten the PG connectors in the three cable holes on the bottom of the ODF06.
NOTE
Do not drag the pigtails when tightening the PG connectors.
10. Close the cover for the OFD06 and use a Torx screwdriver to tighten the six T20 anti-theft
screws on the cover to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-243 Closing the cover for an OFD06
Step 6 Install the same type of optical modules on the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end labeled
1A and 1B on the breakout fiber optic cables to the optical module on the RRU side. For details
about how to install the optical module and CPRI fiber optic cable on the RRU side, see the
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

258

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cabinet installation.
Table 6-26 Cabinet installation checklist
No.
Item
The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering
design.
The base is securely installed.
All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The spring
washers and the flat washers are installed in the correct sequence.
The cabinet is neat and clean.
The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see
6.12.2 Repainting.
Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the installation environment.
Table 6-27 Installation environment checklist
No.
Item
No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.
Electrical Connection Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

259
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Table 6-28 Electrical connection checklist

No.
Item
All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. There
should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cables
in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the power
system. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.
The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered
or crimped.
The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat
shrink tubing.
The flat washers and the spring washers are well mounted on all OT terminals.
The exterior of the storage battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
The shell of the storage battery is clean without any leakage trace.
The wiring terminal on the storage battery stands properly without any damage, and
the post is not covered with any acid substances.
10
The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11
The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive
and negative poles.
12
The voltage of the storage battery is normal.

l The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
l The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13
The circuit breakers for the storage batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cable installation.
Table 6-29 Cable installation checklist
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securely
connected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.

260

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and face
the same direction.
Different types of cables, such as the power cable, PGND cable, feeder, fiber optic
cable, E1/T1, and FE/GE signal cable are separately bound.
The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. For
example, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cable
claw, as shown in the following figure.
All the labels at both ends of the cables are legible.
The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smooth
without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm (0.11 in.) to 5 mm (0.19 in.) of the
outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.
The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will cause
an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 6-244 Checking the maintenance transfer cable

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the DBS3900 are correctly connected.
The power supply to the DBS3900 meets the requirements of the power system.
External power supply to the DBS3900 has been shut off.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

261

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.
All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDU in the TMC11H have been set to OFF.
All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T,
IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D or IBBS700T (battery cabinet for short) have been set
to OFF.
Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.
Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
NOTICE
l Power on a cabinet, BBU3910, or BBU3900 within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power
off a cabinet or BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
Table 6-30 Circuit breakers in a DBS3900

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01C

l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers for a battery cabinet on the
power distribution box
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and
customer transmission equipment.)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

262
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 or

EPU03A-04
DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN
02B. The SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers
control the power input to the transmission
equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,
EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B.)
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers for
a battery cabinet on the power distribution box
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01A
or EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
Power-on Check Process

The following figure shows the power-on check process.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

263

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-245 Power-on check process
Procedure
Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground
to ensure that there is no short circuit.
Step 2 Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit breaker
on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution box in the battery
cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this step.
Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

264

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON, and check
the power supply status of each component.
DANGER
Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltage
operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage using
a damp object may be fatal.
Table 6-31 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet
Component
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H
PMU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU
l The power indicator is steady green.

l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fan assembly
Battery
cabinet
Fan in the
front door
The fan is working properly.
Fan or TEC
in the front
door
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN

indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, CMUEA or CCU01D-03
is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and
off for 1s).
Step 5 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU in the
TMC11H to ON. Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the
DCDU-12B and DCDU-12C.
Step 6 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.
Step 7 Check the power supply to each component according to the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

265
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Table 6-32 Normal status of components in the cabinet

Cabinet
Componen
t
APM30H or
TMC11H
BBU
l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off
for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for
0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s),The
indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are in
status other than steady reda.
RRU

a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check whether the
optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, see BBU
Hardware Description.
Step 8 Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on, handle the
fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 6-33 Troubleshooting
Failure Type
Handling Measure
Failure in the power

supply to all components
in the cabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.

l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power units.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

266

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to a board in the
BBU
Check as follows:
1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the slot on
the backplane is bent, broken, or missing. Replace the subrack
if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status of
indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the board, insert
it into a vacant slot holding the boards of the same type, and
check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is faulty. In
this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case, replace
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block that
connects power supply to the component is on. Skip this step
and go to step 2 if this component does not use any fuse
terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the fuse is
faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according to the
instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go to step
2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the power
cable for the component is connected securely. If the power
cable is not securely connected, turn off the circuit breaker
for the component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power unit) and
reconnect the power cable. If the power cable is securely
connected, the protector (such as circuit breaker or fuse) on
the component may be damaged. In this case, replace the
damaged protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution component.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

267
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
6.12.1 Sealing the Cable Holes

After all cables are installed, seal all cable holes on the cabinets and bases.
Procedure
l
Sealing the Cable Holes in the Cabinet

1.
Route cables through the cable bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten the bags around
the cables, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l All cables must be bound to the cable bridges on one side of the cabinet.
l You can put your hands in the cable bag to help routing cables through the bag.
l The following figure describes the method of fastening cable bags in an APM30H. The
same method is used for fastening the cable bags in other types of cabinets.
Figure 6-246 Fastening the cable bags
Sealing Cable Holes on a Base for an APM30H/TMC11H/IBBS200D/IBBS200T/RFC

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable hole and tighten the two
screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown

268
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-247 Sealing the cable holes on the base
(1) Baffle plate on the right
2.
(2) Baffle plate at the rear
(3) Baffle plate on the left
Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
NOTICE
Fireproof mud is used only for sealing cable holes on the base. Do not use fireproof
mud to seal any cable hole in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

269
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-248 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base
(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l
Tighten the three screws on the baffle plate in front of the base to 1.2 Nm (10.62
lbfin.) and close the baffle plate.
Sealing Cable Holes on the Base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) PVC corrugated pipe

270
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
2.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

271
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1.
Use baffle plates to block the redundant space in the cable outlets, as shown in the
following figure.
2.
Install the front cover plate for the base. Tighten the three M6 countersunk screws on
the front cover plate to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.).

272

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-251 Sealing the cable holes on the base for an IBBS700D/IBBS700T
(2) Baffle plate
(3) Front cover plate
----End
6.12.2 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the following table.
Table 6-34 Color codes
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, slightly rub the area with
sandpaper to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

273

APM30H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 6-252 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the
rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in
the following figures.
Figure 6-253 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply
the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in the following
figures.
NOTICE
The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and
the surface should be smooth.
Figure 6-254 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

274
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.D)
Step 5 Perform the following operations after the repaired paint coating has been exposed in the air for
30 minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, without
obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, there
should be no paint peeled off.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

275
7 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors

and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H

(Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs
About This Chapter
BBU is installed indoors and an outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to RRUs.
7.4 Installing a PGND Cable
A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet.
7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit
When the RRU monitors the devices in the cabinet as a monitoring unit, you need to install the
SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit.
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

276
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

277

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

278
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

279
DBS3900
Installation Guide

in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

280
DBS3900
Installation Guide

to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

281
DBS3900
Installation Guide


NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

282

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the base for a cabinet on a
concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

283

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
For the procedure for installing an IBBS700D/IBBS700T on a base, see Installing the Base in
Procedure
Step 1 Position the base for the cabinet.
1.
Determine the position to install the cabinet according to the engineering drawing and 7.1
Installation Clearance Requirements.
2.
Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following figure.
(1) Wall
3.
After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a long measuring tape to measure the
distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.
Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in
CAUTION
Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

284

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Generally, the concrete floor is solid and smooth. Therefore, you can use the center punch to help locate
the drill bit. If the conditions of the floor allow direct drilling, skip this step.
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 55 mm
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and measure
the distances between holes. If any of the hole is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new
anchor point and drill a new hole.
3.
4.
Hit the expansion bolt with a rubber mallet until the expansion tube completely enters the
hole.
5.
Turning the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer counterclockwise, and remove
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

285
DBS3900
Installation Guide

CAUTION
After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube
is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete
floor evenly and securely.
Step 3 Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Place the base in the determined position on the concrete pad, using the expansion tubes
as reference.
2.
Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not tighten them.
Step 4 Adjust the base until it is horizontally level, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
The base is horizontal only when the mercury is in the center of the level. Add spacers
between the base and the concrete pad to adjust the level if necessary.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

286

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
Step 5 Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.) in a diagonal
sequence, as shown in the following figure.
Step 6 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws on the front cover plate
of the base, and remove the front cover plate.
NOTE
Keep the removed screws and cover plates for later installation.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

287
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Figure 7-14 Remove the front cover plate
Step 7 Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M4 screw assemblies on both sides of the base and
remove the baffle plates.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the left of the rear of
the base and slide the left baffle plate to the left. Then remove the baffle plates on the right
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

288

DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

289

DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

290

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

291
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

292

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

293

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

294
DBS3900
Installation Guide

following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
295

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

296
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

297

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

298

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

299

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

300

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the
APM30H (Ver.B) series cabinets.
Cable
Cross-Sectional Area of
the Cable and Size of the
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable
OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinets.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

301

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)
l 220 V AC or -48 V DC input: green

and yellow
APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets.
Table 7-3 Specifications of a PGND cable
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
l 220 V AC input: green and yellow

NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 7-37.

1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar inside the APM30H, use a screw to
secure the OT terminal of the PGND cable, and then tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
2.
NOTE
7-36.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

302

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 7-37 Installing a PGND cable
bind them.
----End
7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection

Unit
Context
The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the AC power equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

303

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

304
DBS3900
Installation Guide

----End

onsite.
7.6.1 Cable Holes

cabinets.

(1) Left cable hole
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Item
Description
Left cable
hole

305

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Item
Description
Right
cable hole

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

306

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Left cable hole
Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Right cable
hole
Figure 7-45.

IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

307

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS200T.
Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Right cable
hole

IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

308

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS300T.
Item
Description
Left
cable
hole
Right
cable
hole
IBBS300D.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

309

DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBBS700T.
(1) Left cable hole
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

310

DBS3900
Installation Guide
IBBS700T.
Item
Note
Left
cable
hole
Right
cable
hole

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

311

DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

312
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

313
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

314

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

315

DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
316

DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

317

DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
7.6.3 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H

In an APM30H (Ver.D), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the
APM30H (Ver.D) from the external power equipment.
Context
The APM30H supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC duallive-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power cables for the APM30H,
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

318

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
L3
Gray
Blue
Brown
Blue
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
dual-live-wire scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
White
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables.
1.
2.
Add M6 OT terminals to the cables on the EPU side according to the instructions in
Step 2 Install the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables, as shown in Figure 7-56, Figure 7-57, or
Figure 7-58.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
2.
Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar
from the L1, L2, and L3 AC input terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110
V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3.
Route the power cables into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, connect
each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
4.
Install the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.25 Nm (2.21
lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

319
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Figure 7-56 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC three-phase)
Figure 7-57 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC single-phase)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

320

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 7-58 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (110 V AC dual-live-wire)
ties to bind them.
----End
7.6.4 Installing RRU Power Cables

Context
l
A maximum of 12 RRU power cables (6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) can be installed in an APM30H.
RRU power cables are routed into the APM30H through the right cable bag in preference.
If the space in the right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power cables
through the left cable bag.
of an RRU power cable.
Cable
RRU power
cable
RTN(+)
Color
One End
The Other End
Black (North
American)
EPC5 connector
Depending on the port on

the RRU
Brown
(European )
NEG(-)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Blue

321

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cables into the APM30H through the right cable bag.
1.
Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the APM30H to expose the shield layer.
NOTE
If the RRU power cable is routed into the APM30H through the left cable bag, strip a length of jacket
off the RRU power cable immediately after routing it into the cabinet.
2.
Strip the shield layer to expose the two wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away from
the cable bag in the APM30H.
3.
(10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

322

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Add an EPC5 connector to the RRU power cable on the EPU side, as shown in Assembling the
EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.
CAUTION
Step 5 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cable to one of the RRU0 to
RRU5 ports on the EPU or one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown
Figure 7-60 Installing an RRU power cable
bind them.
----End
7.6.5 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable

An RRU monitoring signal cable connects the APM30H and an RRU. This section describes
the procedure and precautions for installing an RRU monitoring signal cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

323
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
The following table lists the mapping between the cord end terminals on the RRU monitoring
signal cable and the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2.
Table 7-11 Mapping between the cord end terminals on the RRU monitoring signal cable and
the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
USLP2
RRU Monitoring Signal Cable
OUT1
IN0
Label on the Cord End Terminal
OUT1
IN0.1
TX+
IN0.2
TX-
IN0.3
RX+
IN0.4
RX-
NOTE
l The four unused cord end terminals must be cut off and the wires must be wrapped with insulation tape
separately so that short-circuits does not occur.
l The RRU monitoring signal cable must be a shielded straight-through cable and be equipped with a
ground clip before it is routed out of the cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU monitoring signal cable through the cable bag on the right side of the cabinet into
the cabinet.
1.
Strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.)
away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the shield layer.
2.
Route the RRU monitoring signal cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield
layer securely contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

324
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Step 3 Install an RRU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the RRU monitoring signal cable to the IN0 port on the USLP2 in the
SLPU of the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the RRU monitoring signal cable to the EXT_LAM port on the
RRU.
NOTE
This section describes the connections and routing of the RRU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H (Ver.D).
The connections and routing of the RRU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
and APM30H (Ver.D) are the same.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

325

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 7-62 Installing the RRU monitoring signal cable
bind them.
----End
7.6.6 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring

Cable
The CMUEA-SLPU surge protection transfer cable connects the CMUEA and USLP2,
providing the surge protection for the monitoring signals.
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-SLPU surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the COM_IN
port on the CMUEA.
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the
OUT1 port on the USLP2 in SLPU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

326

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 7-63 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable
bind them.
----End
7.6.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

327
DBS3900
Installation Guide

ties to bind it.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
7.9.2 Repainting.

328
DBS3900
Installation Guide


No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
329

DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

330

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (battery
cabinet for short) have been set to OFF.
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

331

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
NOTE
Power-on check process

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

332

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

333
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
Battery
cabinet
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
RRU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

334

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

335
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Procedure
l

1.
NOTE

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

336
DBS3900
Installation Guide

2.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

337
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

338
DBS3900
Installation Guide

2.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

339
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1.
following figure.
2.

340

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Baffle plate
----End
7.9.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

341

DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

342
DBS3900
Installation Guide

30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

343
8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.D).
8.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

344
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

345

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

346
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

347
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

348
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

349
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

350

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

351

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

352

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

353
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

354

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

355
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

356

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

357

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

358

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

359
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

360

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

361

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

362
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
363

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

364
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

365

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

366

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

367

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

368

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)

369

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
TMC11H (Ver.C).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)

and yellow
Equipotential
cable
l OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2) for the
stacked cabinets
cabinets installed side by
side
TMC11H (Ver.D).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)
NOTE
A PGND cable and an equipotential cable are installed in the same way for the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H
(Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.
Procedure
1.
2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

370

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar inside the TMC11H (with the
BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) cabinet, use a screw to secure the OT terminal of
the PGND cable, and then tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
2.
NOTE
8-36.
(2) PGND cable
(3) Ground busbar
Step 3 Install the equipotential cable between two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

371

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 8-38 Installing an equipotential cable
bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

372

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

373

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

374

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

375

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

376

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

377

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

378

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

379

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

380

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

381

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

382

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

383

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
8.6.2 Installing the DCDU-12B

You need to install the DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base station
configured only with RFUs.
Context
l
The following figure shows the position for installing the DCDU-12B in a cabinet.
Table 8-5 Position for installing the DCDU-12B
Base Station
BTS3900A (Ver.D)
1 U space at the top of the

RFC
DBS3900
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D), 7 to 12
cabinet
Depending on site
requirements
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D), 7 to 12
cabinet
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

384
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Figure 8-59 Position of a DCDU-12B
The following table lists the specifications of the DCDU-12B power cable.
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
BTS390
0A
(Ver.D)
AC
BTS390
0A
(Ver.D)
DC
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
NEG(-)
Blue
Grey
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
25 mm2
or 0.039
in.2, one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
OT
terminal
(M6)
l 35
mm2
or
0.05
4 in.
OT
terminal
(M6)
Dependi
ng on
the
external
equipme
nt
(low
smo
ke
zero
halo
gen),
one
grou
p
l 16
mm2
or
0.02
5 in.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

385
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
NEG(-)
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
Blue
Grey
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
25 mm2
or 0.039
in.2, one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
OT
terminal
(M6)
l 35
mm2
or
0.05
4 in.
OT
terminal
(M6)
Dependi
ng on
the
external
equipme
nt
2,
two
grou
ps
DBS390
0
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Configu
red with
a
APM30
H
(Ver.D),
7 to 12
RRUs
are
installed
in a
cabinet
RTN(+)
Black
Blue
NEG(-)
Blue
Grey
Configu
red with
a
TMC11
H
(Ver.D),
7 to 12
RRUs
are
RTN(+)
Black
Blue

(low
smo
386
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Base
Station
Applic
ation
Scenari
o
Cable
installed
in a
cabinet
NEG(-)
Color
Most
Region
s
UK
Blue
Grey
CrossSection
al Area
Connector
One
End
The
Other
End
ke
zero
halo
gen),
one
grou
p
l 16
mm2
or
0.02
5 in.
2,
two
grou
ps
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws on both sides of the slot for installing the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-60 Installing a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

387
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
(1) DCDU-12B
(2) Cable claw
Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable.

1.
2.

Table 8-7 Cable Connector
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Add new
connectors to both
ends of the power
cable according to
the instructions in
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable.
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
External power
equipment

Add new OT
terminals to one end
of the power cable
according to the
388
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
DBS3900
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D)
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
instructions in
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable. The
connector at the
other end depends
on the site
requirements.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable from the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input
terminals on the DCDU-12B, and tighten the screws on the DCDU-12B to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
2.
Reinstall the protective cover, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective
cover to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment,
as described in the following table.
Table 8-8 Cable Installation Position
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DC output terminal
RFC2 on the EPU in
the APM30H, and
tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.)
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
DC output terminal
RFC1 on the EPU in
the APM30H, and
tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.)
External power
equipment
Corresponding port
on the external
power equipment
Configured with a
APM30H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

389

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
DBS3900
Configured with a
TMC11H (Ver.D),
7 to 12 RRUs are
installed in a
cabinet
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
Figure 8-62 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

390

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
(1) AC heater
(2) SOU
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

391
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

If...
Then...
Perform Step 2.1
Perform Step 2.2
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).

392
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
8-68.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).

393

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

394

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
8.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Black
Procedure
Step 1 Select the step according to the types of the TMC11H.
If...
Then...
An TMC11H(Ver.B) or TMC11H(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
An TMC11H(Ver.D) is used
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

395

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

396

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

397

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable
Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1.
2.
following table.
Base Station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
DC output terminal
LOAD8
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B

DC output terminal
LOAD7
398
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
3.
4.
1.
2.
fan assembly in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

399

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

400
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

401
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

402

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

403

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

404

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
8.6.6 Installing the DDF

The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.
Context
l
The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.
In the following figure showing the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different
meanings.
a and b indicate signal cables.
s indicates a PGND cable.
Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are routed on the
right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.
The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When installing an E1
coaxial cable, install an insulating pad between the wiring terminal and the DDF.
Procedure
Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the BBU side. This twisted pair cable is connected
to the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

405

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the peer equipment side. This twisted pair cable
is connected to the peer equipment.
1.
2.
Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-82 Cabling on the DDF
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

406

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the DDF.
l When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to actual
situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same, as shown in Figure 8-82.
Step 4 Select the step according to the types of the cabinet.

If...
Then...
Go toStep 5.
An APM30H(Ver.D) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A) is used
Go toStep 6.
1.
2.

NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

407

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no, install the
floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack.
Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to tighten two
M6x12 screws on each side of the DDF to 2 Nm (17.70 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-85 Installing the DDF
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

408

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
409

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

410
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

411

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

412

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
413

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

414

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
8.7.2 Cable Holes

cabinets.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

415
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
(1) Left cable hole
Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Right
cable hole
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

416

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) Left cable hole
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

417

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Right cable
hole
Figure 8-99.

IBBS200T.
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

418

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Item
Description
Left cable
hole
Right cable
hole

IBBS300T.
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

419

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Item
Description
Left
cable
hole
Right
cable
hole
IBBS300D.

IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

420
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
(1) Left cable hole
IBBS700T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Item
Note
Left
cable
hole

421

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Item
Note
Right
cable
hole

Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC11H

Input power cables for the TMC11H are the DCDU power cables. They connect the TMC11H
and the external power equipment, feeding external power to the TMC11H.
Context
Input power cables for the TMC11H are DCDU power cables, which can be power cables for
the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. The following table lists the specifications of the
power cables.
Table 8-17 Specifications of DCDU power cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipme
nt
Cable
Color
One End
The
Other
End
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03
B
DCDU-03
B power
cable
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT
terminal
(M6, 4
mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
Dependin
g on the
external
equipment
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11
B
DCDU-11
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12
B
DCDU-12
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue

OT
terminals
[M6, 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) for one
group of
power
cables or
16 mm2
(0.025 in.
2) for two
groups of
power
cables]
422

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Route the DCDU power cables into the cabinet through the cable bag or cable hole on the bottom
left side of the cabinet.
Step 2 Add a DCDU power cable
1.
2.
Add a connector of terminals to each end of the power cable according to the instructions
in Table 8-17. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 3 Install the DCDU power cables, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
The following figure uses the DCDU-12B power cable as an example. The procedures are the same for installing
the DCDU-03B power cable and DCDU-11B power cable.
1.
2.
Connect the M6 OT terminals at one end of the DCDU power cable to the RTN(+) and
NEG(-) terminals on the DCDU in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
3.
Figure 8-102 Installing the DCDU-12B power cables for the TMC11H (Ver.D)
Step 4 Connect the other end of the DCDU power cables to the external power equipment.
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

423

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-0
3B
BBU
power
cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-1
1B
BBU
power
cables
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-1
2B
BBU
power
cables
Color
One End The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
Bent by
90
degrees,
OT
terminals
(M4, 6
mm2 or
0.009 in.
2)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
3V3 connector
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
EPC4
connector
NOTE
l In capacity expansion scenarios, two BBUs are configured. The power cable for the second BBU is
installed in the same way as that for the first BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

424

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment.
1.
2.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B
See Assembling the OT

Terminal and the Power
Cable.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B
See Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector

(Pressfit Type) and the Power
Cable(1).
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B
See Assembling the EPC4

Connector and the Power
Cable.
in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the power equipment, as
described in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B
Connect the OT terminals at

one end of the power cable to
the LOAD6 terminal on the
DCDU-03B, then tighten the
screws on the connector to
1.2 Nm (10.61 lbfin.), as
shown in Figure 8-103.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B
Connect the tool-less female

connector (pressfit type) at
the LOAD6 port on the
DCDU-11B, as shown in
Figure 8-104.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B
Connect the EPC4 connector

at one end of the power cable
to the LOAD6 port on the
Figure 8-105.

425

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector, tool-less female connector (pressfit type), or OT
terminal at the other end is connected to the LOAD7 port or LOAD7 terminal on the DCDU.
CAUTION
Figure 8-103 Installing a BBU power cable (when the DCDU-03B supplies power)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

426

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 8-105 Installing BBU power cables (when the DCDU-12B supplies power)
Step 4 Optional: When installing power cables for the second BBU in the TMC11H (Ver.D), see
Figure 8-105.
1.
Prepare a BBU power cable following the operations in Step 1.
2.
UPEU in the BBU.
3.
on the EPU.
bind them.
----End
Installing RRU Power Cables

Context
l
A maximum of 12 RRU power cables (6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) can be installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.D).
RRU power cables are routed into the TMC11H (Ver.D) through the right cable bag in
preference. If the space in the right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power
cables through the left cable bag.
The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

427
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

Cabinet
Type
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCD
U-03B
RRU
power
cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
DCD
U-11B
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
Bent by 90 degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 3.3 mm2
or 0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
RTN
(+)
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
terminals (M4, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
Tool-less female
connector (pressfit type)
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Blue

428
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Cabinet
Type
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCD
U-12B
RRU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
EPC5 connector
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cables into the TMC11H through the cable bag or the cable outlet module
on the bottom right side.
Step 2 Strip a 500 mm (19.69 in.) length of jacket and shield layer off the RRU power cable from one
end.
Step 3 Prepare an RRU power cable.
1.
2.
Install a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in
the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B
See Adding OT Terminals to

the DC RRU Power Cable on
the DCDU Side.

429

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(2).
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable(2).
Step 4 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 8-107.

1.
from the right cable bag for the TMC11H to expose the shield layer.
NOTE
If the RRU power cable is routed into the TMC11H (Ver.D) through the left cable bag, strip a length
of jacket off the RRU power cable near the cable bag to expose the shield layer after the cable is
routed into the cabinet.
2.
mm (13.78 in.) away from the right cable bag for the TMC11H.
3.
(10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

430

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

431
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
CAUTION
Step 6 Install a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in the
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

one end of the blue and black/
brown wires of the power
cable to the NEG(-) and RTN
(+) parts in one of the
LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals
on the DCDU-03B, then
tighten the M4 screw to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.). as shown
in Figure 8-108.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

one of the LOAD0 to
LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 8-109.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

to one of the LOAD0 to
LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 8-110.

432
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Figure 8-108 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-03B supplies power)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

433

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 8-110 Installing RRU power cables (when the DCDU-12B supplies power)
bind them.
----End


transfer cable.
Context
l
same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses
the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

434

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

435

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
The following figure shows a GU base station using separate transmission. For the E1/T1
cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable
Connections' in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 cable are the same in the TMC11H
(Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.B). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D)
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

436

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

437
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
bind them.
----End

Context
l
When the TMC11H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T, ensure that the ground clip
has been moved from the ATMC11H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T before installing the
FE/GE Ethernet cable.
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the
TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.
Procedure
1.
At a position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag (TMC11H (Ver.D)) or within 1
m (3.28 in.) away from the cable hole on the cabinet (TMC11H (Ver.C) or TMC11H
(Ver.B)), strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

438
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

439

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

440

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The connections and routing of FE/GE fiber optic cables in TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H
(Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are the same. This section describes the connections and
routing of the FE/GE fiber optic cables in the TMC11H (Ver.D).
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
441
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

442

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End
8.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables

station.
Prerequisites
l
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(1) Maximum rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

443

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

444

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
l If the two BBUs are installed in the same TMC11H cabinet by referring to Figure 8-123. If BBU0 and
BBU1 are installed in two TMC11H cabinets by referring to Figure 8-124.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

445
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

446

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End
8.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900

Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs
of a DBS3900 from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

447
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Context
NOTE
l When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must be installed
onsite.
l If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in Figure 8-125, another monitoring signal
cable must be installed onsite.
l A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, and the second BBU is installed in the
TMC11H.
Figure 8-125 One TMC11H expanded to Two TMC11Hs
Procedure
1.
2.
Figure 8-126 Installing the monitoring signal cable in one TMC11H
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

448

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal
cable must be installed, as shown in the following figure.
1.
CMUEA in the added TMC11H.
2.
the UPEU in the BBU of the original TMC11H.
Figure 8-127 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured two TMC11Hs
bind them.
----End

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
449

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
ties to bind it.
----End
8.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

450
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
Procedure
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Step 2 Install fiber optic cables on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 8-131 and Figure 8-132.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber
optic cables.
2.
Insert the connectors into the optical module in the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

451

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cables along the left side of the cabinet through the cable bag on the
bottom left side of the cabinet, and to the corresponding RRUs.
Step 4 Install the same type of optical modules in both the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end
labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optic cables to the optical module in the RRU side. For details
about how to install the optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU side, see the
NOTICE
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on the BBU
side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected
to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively.
bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

452
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)

No.
Item
design.
8.10.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item

453
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

454

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item

Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

455

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
NOTICE

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03B or
DCDU-03C

equipment.)
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11B or
DCDU-11C

TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12B or
DCDU-12C
NOTE
(1) In this section, a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

456

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

457

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER
Table 8-26 Normal power supply status of each component

Cabinet
Component
TMC11H
Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

458

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End


Procedure
l

1.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

459

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

460
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
2.
NOTICE
(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

461
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
2.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

462
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
(1) Fireproof mud
3.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1.
following figure.
2.

463

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Baffle plate
----End
8.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

464

TMC11H (Ver.D)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

465
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.D)
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

466

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C).
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

467
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

468

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

469
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

470
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

471
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

472
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

473

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

474

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

475

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

476
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

477

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

478
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

479

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

480

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

481

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

482

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
IBBS300T.
Procedure
Base.
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

483
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

484

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
hole
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

485

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

486

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

487

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

488

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Flat washer
(2) Spring washer
(3) Nut
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

489
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
(1) Anchor points
figure.
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

490

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

491

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

492

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

493

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

494
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

for a Cabinet
Context
l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
PGND cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)


and yellow
495

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
Equipotenti
al cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
l OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2) for the
stacked cabinets

and yellow
l OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2) for the
cabinets installed
side by side
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
2.
NOTE
9-40.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

496
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

497
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
(2) PGND cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

498
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

499
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

500

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

501

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

502

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

503

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

504

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

505

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

506

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

507

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

508

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

509

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

510

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

511

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

512

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Universal

513
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Procedure
NOTE
1.
2.
the SOU.
3.
4.
NOTE
same.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

514

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

515

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) SOU
(1) AC heater
Procedure

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

516

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
If...
Then...
Perform Step 2.1
Perform Step 2.2
1.

a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
9-75.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
517

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

518

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Black
Procedure
If...
Then...
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

519

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

520

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

521
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
1.
2.
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
DC output terminal
LOAD7
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05

DC output terminal
LOAD4
522

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DC output fuse
terminal LOAD5
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
3.
4.
1.
2.
PMU in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

523

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

524
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

525
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

526

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

527

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

528

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
9.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries

batteries and the power cables for the storage batteries in an IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

529

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
DANGER
negative poles of the storage batteries.
l Insulate all tools used for installation to avoid burning of storage batteries and to ensure
personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the input and output circuit breakers for the storage batteries have been turned off.
If the circuit breakers are turned on, an excessively large current may occur.
1.
Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H is set to OFF, as
Figure 9-89 Input circuit breaker for the storage batteries
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Check that the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breaker on the power distribution box
for the storage batteries is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure.

530

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-90 Output circuit breakers for the storage batteries
Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE
Step 3 Secure the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Loosen the three M4 screws on the baffle plate.

531
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
2.
Move the baffle plate upward until it touches the screws.
3.
Tighten the three screws to secure the baffle plate until the tightening torque reaches 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 9-92 Securing the baffle plate
(1) Baffle plate
1.
Remove the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.
2.
3.
Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries.
The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the power
cable for the positive pole. Tighten the screws on the connectors to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

532

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-93 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries
The following figure shows the routing of power cables in the battery cabinet.
Figure 9-94 Routing of power cables for the storage batteries
----End

onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

533

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

534

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
out underground.
NOTE
l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

535
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

536

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

537

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
538

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

539

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
9.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules

During cable installation, you must route the cables through the left and the right cable outlet
modules at the bottom of the cabinet for effective sealing.
Context
Two cable outlet modules are located on the bottom left and bottom right of the APM30H,
TMC11H, and IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

540
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
NOTE
l This section uses the TMC11H as an example. Cable outlet modules are the same in the APM30H,
IBBS200D, or IBBS200T.
l When two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts are stacked, you do not need to install cable outlet modules
in the upper IBBS.
Figure 9-103 Cable outlet modules in the TMC11H
The following figure shows the cable outlet modules in the TMC11H.
NOTE
l The cable hole through which a cable is routed depends on the onsite requirements.
l The following figure shows the recommended routing method. In this figure, cable holes with different
colors have different sizes, and cable holes with the same color have the same size. Cables not described
in the following table are routed through the vacant cable holes that match the cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

541

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Cable hole for the 220 V single-phase AC input power (8) Cable hole for the AC output power cable
cable, 110 V dual-live-wire AC input power cable, 35
mm2 (0.054 in.2) external DC input power cable, or 16
mm2 (0.025 in.2) external DC input power cable
(2) Cable hole for the GPS jumper
(9) Cable hole for the DC output power cable
(3) Cable hole for the PGND cable
(10) Cable holes for the fiber optic cables
(4) Cable hole for the equipotential cable between

cabinets
(11) Cable hole for the Boolean alarm cable, RS485

signal cable, or the E1/T1 cable
(5) Cable hole for the E1/T1 cable
(6) Cable hole for the fiber optic cable
(13) Cable hole for the power cable for storage

batteries
(7) Cable hole for the 220 V three-phase AC input power (14) Cable hole for the RRU power cable
cable, 220 V single-phase AC input power cable, 110 V
dual-live-wire AC input power cable, or 16 mm2 (0.025
in.2) external DC input power cable
NOTE
The following figure shows two cable types for No. 7 cable hole:
l When the rubber plug (green in the figure) in the hole is removed, the cable size ranges from 15.0 mm
(0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in).
l When the rubber plug (green in the figure) in the hole is reserved, the cable size ranges from 11.0 mm
(0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).
Procedure
Step 1 Route cables with different cross-sectional areas through the cable outlet modules based on the
apertures of the holes in the modules, and then insert the cable outlet modules into the cable
holes of the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

542

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Route each cable through a hole whose aperture matches the cross-sectional area of the cable,
as shown in Figure 9-105.
Figure 9-105 Routing cables through the cable outlet module
Step 2 Use rubber plugs to seal all vacant cable holes.

Step 3 Tighten the bolt in the front of the cable outlet module, secure the cable outlet module, and
ensure that all the holes in the cable outlet module are sealed.
----End


In an APM30H (Ver.B), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPS 01B or EPS 01D
power cables. The cables feed power into the EPS 01B or EPS 01D in the APM30H (Ver.B)
from the external power equipment. In an APM30H (Ver.C), the input power cables for the
APM30H refer to EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the
EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.C) from the external power equipment.
Prerequisites
l
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
The PGND cable for the cabinet has been installed.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

543

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H.
Cabinet
Type
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
220 V AC threephase scenario
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.
2)
L3
Gray
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Blue
Brown
Blue
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
110 V AC dual-livewire scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
cables in a 220 V AC
L1
Brown
L2
Black
L3
Gray
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
single-phase
scenario
Brown
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
cables in a 110 V
dual-live-wire
scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
220 V AC singlephase scenario
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2
(6AWG))
OT terminal (M6, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2
(6AWG))

544

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l The following description uses the APM30H (Ver.C) as an example. The procedures are the same for
installing input power cables in the APM30H (Ver.B).
Procedure
Step 1 Install the power cable, as shown in Figure 9-106, Figure 9-107, and Figure 9-108.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the upper and lower M4 screws from the AC baffle
plate, and remove the AC baffle plate.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
3.
Optional: Remove the short-circuiting bar on the L1, L2, and L3 input terminals. If 220
V single-phase or 110 V dual-live wire power is supplied, skip this step.
4.
Route the cable into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, and connect each
wire of the cable to the corresponding terminal, and tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
5.
Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminal, and tighten the screws to 0.3 Nm
(2.66 lbfin.).
6.
Reinstall the AC baffle plate, and tighten the screws to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).
Figure 9-106 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
three-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

(4) PE terminal
545

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
single-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
(2) Terminal box
(4) PE terminal
dual-live-wire)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

546
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
bind them.
----End

Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU power cables and the
power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from the
APM30H into the TMC11H. The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H are optional.
They are delivered with the TMC11H and used when the TMC11H serves as a transmission
cabinet.
Prerequisites
l
Context
In a TMC11H (Ver.B) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-03C is configured. In a TMC11H
(Ver.C) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-11C is configured.
The power cables from the APM30H (Ver.B) to the TMC11H and the power cables from the
APM30H (Ver.C) to the TMC11H have the same specifications. The following table lists the
specifications of the power cables.
Cabinet
Type
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
power cables
APM30H
(Ver.C)
APM30H
(Ver.B)/
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
DCDU-11C
power cables
Power cables
for the AC
junction box
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M6,
4 mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Brown
OT terminal (M4, OT terminal (M4,

1.5 mm2 or 0.002 1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
in.2)

547

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Cable
in the
TMC11H
Color
N
One End
The Other End
Blue
NOTE
l The method of installing DCDU-11C power cables is the same as the method of installing DCDU-03C
power cables (which are shortened to DCDU power cables). The following figures use an APM30H
(Ver.C) as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H.
1.
2.
Install connectors to both ends of the cable, as shown in the following table.
Cable
Method of Adding a Connector
DCDU power cable
See Assembling the OT Terminal and the

Power Cable and Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable(1).
Power cables for the AC junction box in

the TMC11H

Power Cable.
1.
2.
Connect the end of the power cable with OT terminals to the DC input terminals on the
DCDU in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the
TMC port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

548
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-109 Installing the DCDU power cables
figure.
1.
2.
Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L and N terminals in the AC
junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L3 and N3 terminals in
the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

549

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are as follows: power cables for
the IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in the
IBBS200D, power cables for the IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T.
The power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are optional. They are
delivered with the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D may
need to be installed according to the onsite situation.
Prerequisites
l
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

550

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 9-8 Specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Power series
120 connector
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power series
175 connector
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the
TEC, and heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) and IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Table 9-9 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heatingfilm power cable
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
Power cable for

the fan in an
IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

the TEC in an
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
(Optional)
Heating-film
power cable in
an IBBS200D
Brown
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for an IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in an
IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, power cables for an IBBS200T, and
power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
551
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
2.

Cable
Power cables for an IBBS200D/

IBBS200T (Ver.B)
See Assembling the Power Series 120

Connector and the Power Cable and
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.

IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Cable.
Power cable for the fan in an

IBBS200D
See Assembling the Tool-Less Female

Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable
(1).
Power cable for the TEC in an

IBBS200T
See Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power

Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

1.
Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the
RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the
IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cable to the battery cabinet power terminal on the inner
right wall of the APM30H, as shown in the following figure. The other end of the power
cable has a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an
APM30H (Ver.C).
NOTE
The method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

552

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-111 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C)
(1) Power terminal for

the battery cabinet
(2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the
in the battery cabinet
upper part of the power
lower part of the power
distribution box
distribution box
Step 3 Install the power cable for a fan in the IBBS200D.

NOTE
The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing
the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for
the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.
1.
Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the
RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled TEC/FAN on the power distribution box in the
IBBS200D below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
to the LOAD3 port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-112 or
Figure 9-113.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

553
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-112 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
(1) Tool-less female

connector (pressfit type) in the battery cabinet
distribution box
distribution box
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

554

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-113 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)

distribution box
distribution box
Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D.
CAUTION
When installing the heating-film power cable in the AC junction box of the IBBS200D, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 9-114.
l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the heating-film AC junction
box.
l The heating-film power cable must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the
top, not from the bottom.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

555

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-114 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cable in the heating-film AC
1.
Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT
terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the heating-film AC junction box on the inner
left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with
OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left
wall of the APM30H.
Figure 9-115 Installing the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D
(1) AC junction box in the power cabinet
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

556
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T feed power from the APM30H to
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and provide power to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and devices in the
IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The power cables include the power cables for the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, heating-film power cable
in the IBBS200D, power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cable between
cascaded IBBS200Ts.
Prerequisites
l
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T
(Ver.B) or IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) or IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C).
Table 9-10 Specifications of the power cables for cabinets and power cables between cascaded
cabinets
Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Color
One End
The Other End
Power series
120 connector
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power series
175 connector
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds/
RTN(+)
Red

557

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Color
IBBS200Ts
(Ver.B)
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
One End
The Other End
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2)
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), heating-film
power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T
(Ver.B) or (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200D (Ver.B) have the same specifications as
those in IBBS200D (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200T (Ver.B) have the same
specifications as those in the IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Table 9-11 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, fan power cable between cascaded
cabinets, and heating-film power cable
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 2.5 mm2 or
0.004 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
Power cable for

the fan in an
IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

the TEC in an
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Fan power cable

between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
(Optional)
Heating-film
power cable in
an IBBS200D
Brown
Blue
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

558

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, power cables between
cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, fan power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, and power cable for
the TEC in an IBBS200T.
1.
2.

Cable

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

Cable.

IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Cable.

IBBS200D

(1).

IBBS200T

Power Cable.
Power cable between cascaded

IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), fan
power cable between cascaded
IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), and
heating-film power cable in an
IBBS200D (Ver.B)/(Ver.C)

Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and power cables between cascaded
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
1.
Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Connect the red and black wires at
one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals
labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the
APM30H, and the other end with a 120 or 175 series connector to the battery cabinet power
terminals on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-116. The power
cable uses a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an
APM30H (Ver.C).
2.
Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect the red and
black wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
wiring terminals labeled BAT in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in Figure 9-116.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

559

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
The method of installing power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The method of installing the power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Figure 9-116 Installing the power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power
cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)
(1) Power terminal for (2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the
the battery cabinet
upper part of the power lower part of the power
distribution box
distribution box
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D and fan power cable between cascaded
IBBS200Ds.
1.
Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. Connect the black and blue wires at
labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below
the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the
LOAD3 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-117.
2.
Install the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. Connect the black and blue wires
at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

560
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two
IBBS200Ds, as shown in Figure 9-117.
NOTE
l The method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same
as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). The method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C). The following figure uses an
IBBS200D (Ver.C) as an example.
l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of
installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing
the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.
l When the number of IBBS cabinets is twice the number of APM cabinets but a TEC power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ts is unavailable, a power cable needs to be installed for the TEC in the
second IBBS200T. The installation method is as follows: Connect the black and blue wires at one end
of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN
in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other
end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPU or EPS in the
APM30H.
Figure 9-117 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) and fan power
cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C)

(2) Power distribution
(3) Wiring terminals in
connector (pressfit type) box in the battery cabinet the upper part of the
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


the lower part of the
561
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds.
CAUTION
When installing the heating-film power cables in the AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do
not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 9-118.
junction boxes.
l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction boxes from
junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall
of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power
cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the
inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

562

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
Install the heating-film power cable in the second IBBS200D. Connect the brown and blue
wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L1 and N1 wiring
terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and
blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and
N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below
the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-119.
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

563

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

The BBU power cable in the APM30H feeds power from the EPU or EPS into the BBU.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipme
nt
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B/
01D
BBU
power
cable
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU03A03/05
Color
One End
The Other End
RT
N
(+)
Black
3V3
connector
Tool-less female
connector (pressfit
type)
NE
G
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Add a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the BBU power cable. For details, see
Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1).
Step 3 Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end of the power cable to the
LOAD1 port on the EPS in the APM30H (Ver.B) or the BBU_0 port on the EPU in the APM30H
(Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

564

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l Connect the blue wire in the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the left part of the port on the
EPS or the upper part of the port on the EPU, and the black wire in the connector to the right part of
the port on the EPS or the lower part of the port on the EPU.
l When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment
by using a BBU power cable. Connect the end of the second BBU power cable with a 3V3 connector
to the -48V port on the second UPEU, and the end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to
the LOAD2 port on the EPS or the BBU_1 port on the EPU.
Figure 9-120 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 9-121 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

565
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
bind them.
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable that feeds power into
an RRU from the power equipment in the APM30H.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS
RRU
power
cable
RT
N
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU
APM30H
(Ver.B)
(+24 V)
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
North
Americ
an
NE
G(-)
Blue
RT
N
(+)
Black

Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4,
3.3 mm2 or 0.005
in.2(12AWG))
566

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
Color
standar
d)
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
Europea
n
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Brown
NE
G(-)
Blue
One End
The Other
End
Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable into the cabinet through a cable outlet module.
Step 2 Strip 500 mm (19.69 in.) long jacket and shield layer off the RRU power cable from one end.
Step 3 In a position 200 mm (7.87 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip the jacket for about 40
mm (1.57 in.) off the RRU power cable to expose the shield layer. Thread the cable through the
ground clip to ensure full contact between the shield layer and the ground clip, and then tighten
the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 9-123.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

567
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

568

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Cut the RRU power cable to a proper length and add a connector to the RRU power cable on
the power equipment side, as described in the following table.
NOTICE
When preparing a power cable, cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
Power Equipment
EPS

Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power
Cable(1).
DCDU-03B
See Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU

Power Cable on the DCDU Side.
EPU

Cable(2).
Step 5 Install the RRU power cables.

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the
RRU.
569
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
2.
Power Equipment
EPS
Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit

type) at one end of the power cable to one of the
RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPS, as shown in
Figure 9-124.
DCDU-03B
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the blue

and black/brown wires of the power cable to the
NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0 to
LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B, then tighten
the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown
in Figure 9-125.
EPU

RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPU, as shown in
Figure 9-126.
Figure 9-124 Installing an RRU power cable (when the EPS supplies power)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

570

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-126 Installing an RRU power cable (when the EPU supplies power)
bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

571

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

572
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Context
l
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

573

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

574
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
GE Ethernet cable.
Procedure
1.
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

575
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

576

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

577

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

578

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

579

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs

of a DBS3900 from one APM30H to two APM30Hs.
Context
l
If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure, another
monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For the
monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the
APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Figure 9-136 One APM30H expanded to two APM30Hs
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

580

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-137 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H
Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, another CMUE-BBU monitoring
signal cable must be installed between the two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the
UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on
the CMUE in the added APM30H.
Figure 9-138 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between two APM30Hs
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

581
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 2 APM30Hs+2
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the

following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
Figure 9-139 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

582
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the
door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

583

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-141 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T
Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, two

additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
1.
Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added
APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the fan
assembly in the added APM30H.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between the added APM30H and the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port
on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then, connect the other end of
the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

584

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-142 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2
APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

585

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three


following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
Figure 9-143 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

586
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two IBBS200Ds or
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

587
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-145 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

588

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IBBS200T
Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2

APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three additional monitoring signal cables must be
installed onsite, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two added IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE on the
door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Then, connect the other
end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the other added
3.
Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added
original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUE in the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

589

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

590

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
When a base station is configured with one APM30H and one TMC11H, two monitoring
signal cables must be installed onsite.
If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following

figure, an additional monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
Figure 9-148 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the
fan assembly of the TMC11H.
591
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
2.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in
the BBU.
Figure 9-150 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H
Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1
TMC11H, another monitoring signal cable connecting the TMC11H and the added APM30H
must be installed. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan
assembly of the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUE in the fan assembly of the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

592

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-151 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs

+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2
APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H,

three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as

shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

593

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-152 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
594

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
the APM30H.
or IBBS200T
figure.
1.
2.
the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

595
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-155 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H
Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1

TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring
signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H. Connect
one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the
TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in
the fan assembly of the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

596

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

597

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
When a site is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, four


shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed
onsite.
Figure 9-157 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
598
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
2.
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

599

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 9-159 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two IBBS200Ds or
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

600
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs
figure.
1.
2.
the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

601
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 9-161 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H
Step 5 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1

TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, three additional monitoring
1.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUEs in the two added
IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the
CMUE on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H.
Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of
the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
3.
one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the
TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

602

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

603

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(2) Wavelength
(1) Maximum rate
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

604

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
605

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
Figure 9-166 Installing the inter-BBU signal cables
----End

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
606

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

607
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
Procedure
Step 1 Install optical modules in the BBU side, as shown in Figure 9-168 and Figure 9-169.
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the CPRI ports on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the optical module into a CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or LBBP.
5.
Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.
2.
Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cables into
the optical module in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectors
labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

608
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on
the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.),
respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be
connected to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively.
l The fiber optical cables in an IMB03 need be routed and bound along the right side of
the IMB for easy maintenance of the fan in the future.
l When an IMB03 is installed on a wall, the fiber optical cables out of the IMB03 should
be routed with the bending radius of equal to or greater than 140 mm (5.512 in.).
bind them.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
609
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
No.
Item
9.10.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
610
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)
No.
Item
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

611

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item

Prerequisites
l
to OFF.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

612

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
NOTICE

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

613

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

614

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

615

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER
Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
Battery
cabinet
Fan in the
front door
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

off for 1s).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

616
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.C)

Cabinet
Componen
t
APM30H or
TMC11H
BBU

for 1s).
RRU

NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

617

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

618

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
9.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base.

After all cables are installed, seal all cable holes on the base.
Procedure
Step 1 Use cover plates to block the cable holes and tighten the two screws on each cover plate, as
Step 2 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
(1) Fireproof mud
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

619

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Fireproof mud is used only for sealing cable holes on the base. Do not use fireproof mud to seal any cable
hole in the cabinet.
Step 3 Tighten the three screws on the baffle plate in front of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End
9.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

620

APM30H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

621

and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs
DBS3900
Installation Guide
10

(Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs
About This Chapter

BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.C) supplies power to RRUs.
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

622
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

623

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

624
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

625
DBS3900
Installation Guide

in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

626
DBS3900
Installation Guide

to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

627
DBS3900
Installation Guide


NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

628

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

629

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

630

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

631
DBS3900
Installation Guide

CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

632

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

633
DBS3900
Installation Guide

figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

634

DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

635

DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

636

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

637
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

638

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

639

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

640
DBS3900
Installation Guide

following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
641

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

642
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

643

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

644

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

645

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

646

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

647

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)

and yellow
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)

NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.

1.
lbfin.).
2.
NOTE
10-36.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

648

DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Unit
Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

649

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

650

DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
651

DBS3900
Installation Guide

l

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

652

DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

653

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

654

DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
655

DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

656

DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
657

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Cabinet
Type
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.
2)
L3
Gray
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Blue
Brown
Blue
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
L1
Brown
L2
Black
L3
Gray
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
single-phase
scenario
Brown
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
cables in a 110 V
dual-live-wire
scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2
(6AWG))
OT terminal (M6, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2
(6AWG))

658

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
lbfin.).
5.
(2.66 lbfin.).
6.
three-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

(4) PE terminal
659

DBS3900
Installation Guide
single-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
(2) Terminal box
(4) PE terminal
dual-live-wire)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

660
DBS3900
Installation Guide

ties to bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS
RRU
power
cable
RT
N
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU
APM30H
(Ver.B)
(+24 V)
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
North
NE
G(-)
Blue
RT
N
(+)
Black

Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4,
3.3 mm2 or 0.005
in.2(12AWG))
661

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
Color
Americ
an
standar
d)
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
Europea
n
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Brown
NE
G(-)
Blue
One End
The Other
End
Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

662
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

663

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Power Equipment
EPS

Cable(1).
DCDU-03B

EPU

Cable(2).

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RRU.
664
DBS3900
Installation Guide

2.
Power Equipment
EPS

Figure 10-53.
DCDU-03B

in Figure 10-54.
EPU

Figure 10-55.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

665

DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

666
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
USLP2
OUT1
IN0
OUT1
IN0.1
TX+
IN0.2
TX-
IN0.3
RX+
IN0.4
RX-
NOTE
Procedure
the cabinet.
1.
2.
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

667
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
SLPU of the APM30H.
2.
RRU.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

668

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 10.6.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

669
DBS3900
Installation Guide

ties to bind it.
----End
10.6.6 Installing a CMUE-SLPU Surge Protection Transfer Cable

The CMUE-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable connects the CMUE and USLP2, enabling
surge protection for monitoring signals.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable to the COM IN port
on the CMUE.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the OUT1 port on the USLP2 in the SLPU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

670
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Figure 10-59 Installing the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable
Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind it.
Step 3 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.

671
DBS3900
Installation Guide

No.
Item
10.9.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.

672

DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

673

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

674

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

675

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

676
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
Battery
cabinet
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

677

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

678

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Procedure
(1) Fireproof mud
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

679

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
----End
10.9.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

680

DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

681

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
11

Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

682
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

683

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

684
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

685
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

686
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

687
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

688

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

689

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

690

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

691
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

692

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

693
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

694

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

695

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

696

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

697
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

698

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

699

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

700
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
701

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

702
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

703

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

704

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

705

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

706

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)

707

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
TMC11H (Ver.C).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)

and yellow
Equipotential
cable
stacked cabinets
side
TMC11H (Ver.D).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

708

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
NOTE
11-36.
(2) PGND cable
(3) Ground busbar
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

709

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

710

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

711

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

712

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

713

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

714

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

715

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

716

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

717

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

718

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

719

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

720

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

721

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 11-59. If an SOU is installed in the cabinet,
install the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure 11-60.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

722

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) AC heater
(2) SOU
Procedure

If...
Then...
Perform Step 2.1
Perform Step 2.2
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

723

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
11-64.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).

724

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

725

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Black
Procedure
If...
Then...
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

726

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

727

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

728

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable

1.
2.
following table.
Base Station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
DC output terminal
LOAD8
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B

DC output terminal
LOAD7
729
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
3.
4.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

730

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

731
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

732
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

733

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

734

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

735

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

736

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

737
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

738
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

739

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

740

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
741

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

742

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

743
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTE
in the upper IBBS.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

744

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

cabinets


batteries
NOTE
(0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in).
(0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

745

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE

----End


Context
power cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

746

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipme
nt
Cable
Color
One End
The
Other
End
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03
B
DCDU-03
B power
cable
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT
terminal
(M6, 4
mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
Dependin
g on the
external
equipment
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11
B
DCDU-11
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12
B
DCDU-12
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT
terminals
[M6, 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) for one
group of
power
cables or
16 mm2
(0.025 in.
2) for two
groups of
power
cables]
Procedure
1.
2.
NOTE
1.
2.
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

747
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-0
3B
BBU
power
cable
RTN(+)
wire
Color
Black
Bent by
90

3V3 connector
748
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-1
1B
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-1
2B
Cable
BBU
power
cables
BBU
power
cables
Color
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
degrees,
OT
terminals
(M4, 6
mm2 or
0.009 in.
2)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
EPC4
connector
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

Cable.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(1).

749

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

1.2 Nm (10.61 lbfin.), as
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Figure 11-91.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Figure 11-92.
NOTE
CAUTION
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

750
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

751
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
Figure 11-92.
1.
2.
UPEU in the BBU.
3.
on the EPU.
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
(Ver.D).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCD
U-03B
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
or 0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)

752
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cabinet
Type
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
DCD
U-11B
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
RTN
(+)
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
The Other
End
Tool-less female
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCD
U-12B
RRU
power
cable
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
EPC5 connector
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Blue

753

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
end.
1.
2.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

the DCDU Side.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(2).
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable(2).

1.
NOTE
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

754
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
3.
(10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

755
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTE
CAUTION
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

in Figure 11-95.

756

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

one of the LOAD0 to
LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 11-96.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 11-97.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

757

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


transfer cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

758

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

759
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Context
l
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

760

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

761

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

762

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

763

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

764

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
765
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

766

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
ties to bind it.
----End

station.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

767

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Prerequisites
l
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(2) Wavelength
(1) Maximum rate
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

768
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

769
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

770

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 11.7.1 Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic
patch cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU
----End

Context
l
When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must
If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure, another
If a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added into
the added TMC11H, and the added BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For
the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the
TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

771

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 11-112 One TMC11H expanded to two TMC11Hs
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in a TMC11H, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUE in the TMC11H.
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on
the UPEU in the BBU of the TMC11H.
Figure 11-113 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the TMC11H
Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs, another
monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU
of the original TMC11H.
2.
in the added TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

772

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 11-114 Installing the monitoring signal cable between two TMC11Hs
bind them.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

773

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

774
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
NOTICE
respectively.
ties to bind them.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
775
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
No.
Item
11.10.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
776
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
No.
Item
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

777

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item

Prerequisites
l
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

778
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03B or
DCDU-03C

equipment.)
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11B or
DCDU-11C

TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12B or
DCDU-12C
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

779

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

780

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER

Cabinet
Component
TMC11H
Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

781

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End


Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

782

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Fireproof mud
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

783

TMC11H (Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
11.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

784
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.C)
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

785

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
12

Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

786
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

787

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

788
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

789
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

790
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

791
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

792

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

793

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

794

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

795
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

796

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

797
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

798

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

799

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

800

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

801

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
IBBS300T.
Procedure
Base.
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

802
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

803

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
hole
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

804

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

805

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

806

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

807

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Flat washer
(2) Spring washer
(3) Nut
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

808
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) Anchor points
figure.
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

809

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

810

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

811

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

812

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

813
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

for a Cabinet
Context
l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
PGND cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)


and yellow
814

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
Equipotenti
al cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
l OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2) for the
stacked cabinets

and yellow
l OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2) for the
cabinets installed
side by side
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
2.
NOTE
12-40.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

815
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

816
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
(2) PGND cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

817
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

818
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

819

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

820

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

821

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

822

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

823

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

824

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

825

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

826

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

827

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

828

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

829

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

830

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

831

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Universal

832
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Procedure
NOTE
1.
2.
the SOU.
3.
4.
NOTE
same.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

833

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

834

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) SOU
(1) AC heater
Procedure

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

835

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
If...
Then...
Perform Step 2.1
Perform Step 2.2
1.

a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
12-75.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
836

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

837

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Black
Procedure
If...
Then...
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

838

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

839

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

840
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
1.
2.
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
DC output terminal
LOAD7
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05

DC output terminal
LOAD4
841

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DC output fuse
terminal LOAD5
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
3.
4.
1.
2.
PMU in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

842

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

843
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

844
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

845

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

846

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

847

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
12.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries

batteries and the power cables for the storage batteries in an IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

848

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
DANGER
l Insulate all tools used for installation to avoid burning of storage batteries and to ensure
personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the input and output circuit breakers for the storage batteries have been turned off.
If the circuit breakers are turned on, an excessively large current may occur.
1.
Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H is set to OFF, as
Figure 12-89 Input circuit breaker for the storage batteries
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Check that the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breaker on the power distribution box
for the storage batteries is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure.

849

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-90 Output circuit breakers for the storage batteries
figure.
NOTE
Step 3 Secure the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Loosen the three M4 screws on the baffle plate.

850
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
2.
Move the baffle plate upward until it touches the screws.
3.
Tighten the three screws to secure the baffle plate until the tightening torque reaches 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 12-92 Securing the baffle plate
(1) Baffle plate
1.
2.
3.
Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries.
The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the power
cable for the positive pole. Tighten the screws on the connectors to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

851

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The following figure shows the routing of power cables in the battery cabinet.
Figure 12-94 Routing of power cables for the storage batteries
----End

onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

852

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

853

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
out underground.
NOTE
l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

854
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

855

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

856

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
857

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

858

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

859
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
in the upper IBBS.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

860

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

cabinets


batteries
NOTE
(0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in).
(0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

861

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE

----End


Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

862

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Cabinet
Type
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.
2)
L3
Gray
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Blue
Brown
Blue
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
L1
Brown
L2
Black
L3
Gray
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
single-phase
scenario
Brown
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
cables in a 110 V
dual-live-wire
scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2
(6AWG))
OT terminal (M6, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2
(6AWG))

863

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
lbfin.).
5.
(2.66 lbfin.).
6.
three-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

(4) PE terminal
864

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
single-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
(2) Terminal box
(4) PE terminal
dual-live-wire)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

865
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU power cables and the
power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from the
APM30H into the TMC11H. The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H are optional.
They are delivered with the TMC11H and used when the TMC11H serves as a transmission
cabinet.
Prerequisites
l
Context
In a TMC11H (Ver.B) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-03C is configured. In a TMC11H
(Ver.C) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-11C is configured.
The power cables from the APM30H (Ver.B) to the TMC11H and the power cables from the
APM30H (Ver.C) to the TMC11H have the same specifications. The following table lists the
specifications of the power cables.
Cabinet
Type
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
power cables
APM30H
(Ver.C)
APM30H
(Ver.B)/
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
DCDU-11C
power cables
Power cables
for the AC
junction box
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M6,
4 mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Brown
OT terminal (M4, OT terminal (M4,

1.5 mm2 or 0.002 1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
in.2)

866

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Cable
in the
TMC11H
Color
N
One End
The Other End
Blue
NOTE
l The method of installing DCDU-11C power cables is the same as the method of installing DCDU-03C
power cables (which are shortened to DCDU power cables). The following figures use an APM30H
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H.
1.
2.
Install connectors to both ends of the cable, as shown in the following table.
Cable
DCDU power cable

Power Cable and Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable(1).
Power cables for the AC junction box in

the TMC11H

Power Cable.
1.
2.
Connect the end of the power cable with OT terminals to the DC input terminals on the
DCDU in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the
TMC port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

867
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
figure.
1.
2.
Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L and N terminals in the AC
junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L3 and N3 terminals in
the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

868

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are as follows: power cables for
the IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in the
IBBS200D, power cables for the IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T.
Prerequisites
l
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

869

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 12-8 Specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Power series
120 connector
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power series
175 connector
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the
TEC, and heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) and IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Table 12-9 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heatingfilm power cable
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
Power cable for

the fan in an
IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

the TEC in an
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
(Optional)
Heating-film
power cable in
an IBBS200D
Brown
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for an IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in an
IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, power cables for an IBBS200T, and
power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
870
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
2.

Cable

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

Cable.

IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Cable.

IBBS200D

(1).

IBBS200T
See Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power

Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

1.
Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the
RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the
IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cable to the battery cabinet power terminal on the inner
right wall of the APM30H, as shown in the following figure. The other end of the power
cable has a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an
APM30H (Ver.C).
NOTE
The method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

871

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-111 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C)
(1) Power terminal for

the battery cabinet
distribution box
distribution box
Step 3 Install the power cable for a fan in the IBBS200D.

NOTE
The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing
the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for
the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.
1.
Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the
RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled TEC/FAN on the power distribution box in the
IBBS200D below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
to the LOAD3 port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-112 or
Figure 12-113.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

872
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 12-112 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)

distribution box
distribution box
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

873

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-113 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)

distribution box
distribution box
Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D.
CAUTION
When installing the heating-film power cable in the AC junction box of the IBBS200D, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 12-114.
l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the heating-film AC junction
box.
l The heating-film power cable must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the
top, not from the bottom.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

874

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-114 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cable in the heating-film AC
1.
terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the heating-film AC junction box on the inner
left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.
2.
Connect the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with
OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left
wall of the APM30H.
Figure 12-115 Installing the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D
ties to bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

875
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
----End

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T feed power from the APM30H to
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and provide power to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and devices in the
IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The power cables include the power cables for the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, heating-film power cable
in the IBBS200D, power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cable between
cascaded IBBS200Ts.
Prerequisites
l
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T
(Ver.B) or IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) or IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C).
Table 12-10 Specifications of the power cables for cabinets and power cables between cascaded
cabinets
Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Color
One End
The Other End
Power series
120 connector
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power series
175 connector
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables for

an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds/
RTN(+)
Red

876

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Color
IBBS200Ts
(Ver.B)
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
(Ver.C)
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
One End
The Other End
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2)
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), heating-film
power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T
(Ver.B) or (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200D (Ver.B) have the same specifications as
those in IBBS200D (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200T (Ver.B) have the same
specifications as those in the IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Table 12-11 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, fan power cable between cascaded
cabinets, and heating-film power cable
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 2.5 mm2 or
0.004 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
Power cable for

the fan in an
IBBS200D
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

the TEC in an
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Fan power cable

between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
(Optional)
Heating-film
power cable in
an IBBS200D
Brown
Blue
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

877

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, power cables between
cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, fan power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, and power cable for
the TEC in an IBBS200T.
1.
2.

Cable

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

Cable.

IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Cable.

IBBS200D

(1).

IBBS200T

Power Cable.
Power cable between cascaded

IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), fan
power cable between cascaded
IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), and
heating-film power cable in an
IBBS200D (Ver.B)/(Ver.C)

Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and power cables between cascaded
1.
Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Connect the red and black wires at
labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the
APM30H, and the other end with a 120 or 175 series connector to the battery cabinet power
terminals on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-116. The power
cable uses a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an
APM30H (Ver.C).
2.
Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect the red and
black wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
wiring terminals labeled BAT in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in Figure 12-116.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

878

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
The method of installing power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The method of installing the power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Figure 12-116 Installing the power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power
cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)
(1) Power terminal for (2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the
the battery cabinet
upper part of the power lower part of the power
distribution box
distribution box
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D and fan power cable between cascaded
IBBS200Ds.
1.
Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. Connect the black and blue wires at
labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below
the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the
LOAD3 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-117.
2.
Install the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. Connect the black and blue wires
at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

879
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two
IBBS200Ds, as shown in Figure 12-117.
NOTE
l The method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same
as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). The method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) is the same as the method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C). The following figure uses an
IBBS200D (Ver.C) as an example.
l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of
installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing
the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.
l When the number of IBBS cabinets is twice the number of APM cabinets but a TEC power cable
between cascaded IBBS200Ts is unavailable, a power cable needs to be installed for the TEC in the
second IBBS200T. The installation method is as follows: Connect the black and blue wires at one end
of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN
in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other
end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPU or EPS in the
APM30H.
Figure 12-117 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) and fan
power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C)

(2) Power distribution
connector (pressfit type) box in the battery cabinet the upper part of the
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


the lower part of the
880
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds.
CAUTION
When installing the heating-film power cables in the AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do
not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 12-118.
junction boxes.
l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction boxes from
junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall
of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power
cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the
inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

881

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
Install the heating-film power cable in the second IBBS200D. Connect the brown and blue
wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L1 and N1 wiring
terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and
blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and
N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below
the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-119.
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

882

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

The BBU power cable in the APM30H feeds power from the EPU or EPS into the BBU.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipme
nt
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B/
01D
BBU
power
cable
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU03A03/05
Color
One End
The Other End
RT
N
(+)
Black
3V3
connector
Tool-less female
connector (pressfit
type)
NE
G
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 3 Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end of the power cable to the
LOAD1 port on the EPS in the APM30H (Ver.B) or the BBU_0 port on the EPU in the APM30H
(Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

883

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l Connect the blue wire in the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the left part of the port on the
EPS or the upper part of the port on the EPU, and the black wire in the connector to the right part of
the port on the EPS or the lower part of the port on the EPU.
l When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment
by using a BBU power cable. Connect the end of the second BBU power cable with a 3V3 connector
to the -48V port on the second UPEU, and the end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to
the LOAD2 port on the EPS or the BBU_1 port on the EPU.
Figure 12-120 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 12-121 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

884
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS
RRU
power
cable
RT
N
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU
APM30H
(Ver.B)
(+24 V)
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
North
Americ
an
NE
G(-)
Blue
RT
N
(+)
Black

Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4,
3.3 mm2 or 0.005
in.2(12AWG))
885

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
Color
standar
d)
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
Europea
n
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Brown
NE
G(-)
Blue
One End
The Other
End
Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

886
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

887

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Power Equipment
EPS

Cable(1).
DCDU-03B

EPU

Cable(2).

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RRU.
888
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
2.
Power Equipment
EPS

Figure 12-124.
DCDU-03B

in Figure 12-125.
EPU

Figure 12-126.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

889

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

890

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

891
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Context
l
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

892

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

893
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
GE Ethernet cable.
Procedure
1.
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

894
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

895

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

896

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

897

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

898

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs

expansion of a DBS3900 from one APM30H to two APM30Hs.
Context
l
If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure, another
Figure 12-136 One APM30H expanded to two APM30Hs
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUA in the APM30H.
899
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on
Figure 12-137 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H
Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, another CMUA-BBU monitoring
signal cable must be installed between the two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the
UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H.
2.
Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on
the CMUA in the added APM30H.
Figure 12-138 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between two APM30Hs
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

900
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 2 APM30Hs+2
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two


following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU is installed in
the added APM30H and does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring
scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

901
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 12-139 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts
Procedure
1.
CMUA in the APM30H.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

902
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

903

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, two

additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added
original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the fan
assembly in the added APM30H.
2.
on the CMUA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then, connect the other end of
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

904

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-142 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

905

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three


following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
Figure 12-143 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Procedure
1.
CMUA in the APM30H.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

906
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs in the two IBBS200Ds or
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on
2.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

907
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 12-145 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

908

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2

APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three additional monitoring signal cables must be
installed onsite, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUAs in the two added
CMUA on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H.
Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door
of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
3.
Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added
original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the
CMUA in the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

909

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-147 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

910

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, two monitoring signal
If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following

figure, an additional monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
Figure 12-148 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
Procedure
1.
CMUA in the APM30H.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

911
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
figure.
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the
TMC11H.
2.
the BBU.
Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1
TMC11H, another monitoring signal cable connecting the TMC11H and the added APM30H
must be installed. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the
TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the
added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

912

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-151 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 2
APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
bind them.
----End
Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H,

three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

913

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-152 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2
Procedure
1.
CMUA in the APM30H.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

914

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
the APM30H.
figure.
1.
TMC11H.
2.
the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

915
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1

TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring
1.
2.
Install another monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the TMC11H. Then,
connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

916

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

917

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2

expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2
Context
l
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1

TMC11H, four monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

918

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 12-157 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs

Procedure
1.
CMUA in the APM30H.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

919
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
the APM30H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

920

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs in the two IBBS200Ds or
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

921
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Figure 12-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs
figure.
1.
TMC11H.
2.
the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

922
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Step 5 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1

TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, three additional monitoring
1.
2.
Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUAs in the two added
CMUA on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H.
Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door
of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
3.
one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the fan assembly of the
TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

923

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

924

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(2) Wavelength
(1) Maximum rate
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

925

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
926

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
----End

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
927

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

928
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
Procedure
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

929
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTICE
respectively.
ties to bind them.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
930
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
No.
Item
12.10.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
931
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)
No.
Item
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

932

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item

Prerequisites
l
to OFF.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

933

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
NOTICE

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

934

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

935

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

936

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER
Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
Battery
cabinet
Fan in the
front door
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

off for 1s).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

937
DBS3900
Installation Guide

APM30H (Ver.B)

Cabinet
Componen
t
APM30H or
TMC11H
BBU

for 1s).
RRU

NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

938

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

939

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Procedure
(1) Fireproof mud
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

940

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
----End
12.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

941

APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

942
13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
13
Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
About This Chapter

in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor +24 V DC scenario. In this
scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

943
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

944

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

945
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

946
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

947
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

948
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

949

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

950

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

951

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

952
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

953

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

954
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

955

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

956

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

957

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

958

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
IBBS300T.
Procedure
Base.
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

959
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

960

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
hole
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

961

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

962

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

963

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

964

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Flat washer
(2) Spring washer
(3) Nut
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

965
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) Anchor points
figure.
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

966

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

967

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

968

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

969

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

970
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

for a Cabinet
Context
l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
PGND cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)


and yellow
971

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
Application
Scenario
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal
Color
Equipotenti
al cable
For APM30H
(Ver.B) series
cabinets and the
APM30H (Ver.B)
+24 V cabinet
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
For the APM30H

(Ver.C) series
cabinets
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
For the APM30H

(Ver.D) series
cabinets
l OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2) for the
stacked cabinets

and yellow
l OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2) for the
cabinets installed
side by side
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
1.
2.
NOTE
13-40.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

972
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

973
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
(2) PGND cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

974
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

975
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

976

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

977

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

978

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

979

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

980

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

981

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

982

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

983

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

984

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

985

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

986

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

987

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

988

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Black
989

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
If...
Then...
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

990

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

991
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

1.
2.
3.
Base Station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05

Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
992
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS

01C
DC output terminal
LOAD7
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B).
EPS 01B or EPS

01D
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.C).
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04
DBS3900
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D).

DC output terminal
LOAD4
DC output fuse
terminal LOAD5
993
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
3.
4.
1.
2.
PMU in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

994

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

995
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

996
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

997

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

998

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

999

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1000

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1001
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1002
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1003

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1004

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1005

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1006

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1007
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
in the upper IBBS.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1008

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

cabinets


batteries
NOTE
(0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in).
(0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1009

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE

----End

Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H (+24 V)

Input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V) feed power into the EPS24S48100DC from the
external power equipment.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1010
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Table 13-6 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V)
Cable
Colour
One End
The Other End
EPS24S48100DC
power cables
Red wire
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on the
external equipment
Black wire
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare EPS24S48100DC power cables.
1.
2.
Add correct connectors to each end of the EPS24S48100DC power cables according to the
instructions in Table 13-6. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws outside the wiring unit of the EPS24S48100DC
power subrack, and remove the protective cover for the wiring unit.
Step 3 Install the EPS24S48100DC power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect two red cables to the + terminals on the EPS24S48100DC power subrack, and
connect two black cables to the - terminals on the EPS24S48100DC power subrack, and
use the screwdriver to tighten the terminals.
2.
Reinstall the protective cover, and use the screwdriver to tighten the screws.
3.
Connect the other end of the EPS24S48100DC power cables to the external power
equipment.
Figure 13-91 Installing the EPS24S48100DC power cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1011

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-0
3B
BBU
power
cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-1
1B
BBU
power
cables
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-1
2B
BBU
power
cables
Color
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
Bent by
90
degrees,
OT
terminals
(M4, 6
mm2 or
0.009 in.
2)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue

3V3 connector
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
EPC4
connector
1012
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

Cable.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(1).
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

1.2 Nm (10.61 lbfin.), as
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Figure 13-93.

1013
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Figure 13-94.
NOTE
CAUTION
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1014

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 13-94.
1.
2.
UPEU in the BBU.
3.
on the EPU.
ties to bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1015

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS
RRU
power
cable
RT
N
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU
APM30H
(Ver.B)
(+24 V)
DCDU03B
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
North
Americ
an
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Black
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
Europea
n
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Brown
NE
G(-)
Blue

Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4,
3.3 mm2 or 0.005
in.2(12AWG))
Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
1016

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1017

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Power Equipment
EPS

Cable(1).
DCDU-03B

EPU

Cable(2).

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RRU.
1018
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
2.
Power Equipment
EPS

Figure 13-97.
DCDU-03B

in Figure 13-98.
EPU

Figure 13-99.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1019

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1020

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1021
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Context
l
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1022

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1023
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
GE Ethernet cable.
Procedure
1.
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1024
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1025

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1026

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1027

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1028
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(1) Maximum rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU

1029

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Interconnection
Mode
UMPT+UMPT
BBU 0
BBU 1
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1030
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1031

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End
13.7.6 Installing a PSU Monitoring Signal Cable and a PSU InPosition Signal Cable
When a DBS3900 is configured with one APM30H (+24 V), you need to install a PSU (DC/
DC) monitoring signal cable and a PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Install a PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the ALM port on the power subrack (DC/DC).
Step 2 Install a PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable to the EXT_ALM1 port on
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the PRESENT port on the power subrack (DC/DC).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1032

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 13-113 Installing the PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable and the PSU (DC/DC) inposition signal cable
bind it.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1033

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1034

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
NOTICE
respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1035

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


No.
Item
design.
13.10.2 Repainting.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1036
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

No.
Item

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1037
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
No.
Item
13

No.
Item
the same direction.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1038

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
Context
NOTICE

Cabinet
Power Device
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS24S48100DC or
DCDU-03B
SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B

(The circuit breakers control the power input to the
RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1039

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H.
Step 3 Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU-03B to ON.
Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply status of
each component.
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1040

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PSU

Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1041

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End


Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1042

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Fireproof mud
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1043

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
13.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1044
DBS3900
Installation Guide

V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1045

and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs
DBS3900
Installation Guide
14

(Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs
About This Chapter

BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to RRUs.
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1046
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1047

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1048
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1049
DBS3900
Installation Guide

in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1050
DBS3900
Installation Guide

to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1051
DBS3900
Installation Guide


NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1052

DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1053

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1054

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1055
DBS3900
Installation Guide

CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1056

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1057
DBS3900
Installation Guide

figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1058

DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1059

DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1060

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1061
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1062

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1063

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1064
DBS3900
Installation Guide

following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
1065

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1066
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1067

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1068

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1069

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1070

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1071

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)

and yellow
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)

NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.

1.
lbfin.).
2.
NOTE
14-36.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1072

DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Unit
Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1073

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1074

DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1075

DBS3900
Installation Guide

l

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1076

DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1077

DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1078

DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1079

DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1080

DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1081

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Cabinet
Type
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Brown
L2
Black
OT terminal (M6,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.
2)
L3
Gray
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Blue
Brown
Blue
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
L1
Brown
L2
Black
L3
Gray
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
single-phase
scenario
Brown
Blue
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 power
cables in a 110 V
dual-live-wire
scenario
L1
Black
L2
Red
White
EPS 01B or EPS 01D

power cables in a
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2
(6AWG))
OT terminal (M6, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2
(6AWG))

1082

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
lbfin.).
5.
(2.66 lbfin.).
6.
three-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

(4) PE terminal
1083

DBS3900
Installation Guide
single-phase)
(1) AC baffle plate
(2) Terminal box
(4) PE terminal
dual-live-wire)
(1) AC baffle plate
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Terminal box

1084
DBS3900
Installation Guide

ties to bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Context
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
APM30H
(Ver.B)
EPS
RRU
power
cable
RT
N
(+)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
EPU
APM30H
(Ver.B)
(+24 V)
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
North
NE
G(-)
Blue
RT
N
(+)
Black

Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4,
3.3 mm2 or 0.005
in.2(12AWG))
1085

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
Color
Americ
an
standar
d)
NE
G(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(comply
ing with
the
Europea
n
standar
d)
RT
N
(+)
Brown
NE
G(-)
Blue
One End
The Other
End
Bent by 90
degrees, OT
terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
NOTE
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1086
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1087

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Power Equipment
EPS

Cable(1).
DCDU-03B

EPU

Cable(2).

1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RRU.
1088
DBS3900
Installation Guide

2.
Power Equipment
EPS

Figure 14-53.
DCDU-03B

in Figure 14-54.
EPU

Figure 14-55.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1089

DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1090
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
USLP2
OUT1
IN0
OUT1
IN0.1
TX+
IN0.2
TX-
IN0.3
RX+
IN0.4
RX-
NOTE
Procedure
the cabinet.
1.
2.
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1091
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
SLPU of the APM30H.
2.
RRU.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1092

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 14.6.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.
----End
14.6.5 Installing a CMUA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable

The CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable connects the CMUA and USLP2, enabling
surge protection for monitoring signals.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the COM IN
port on the CMUA.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the OUT1 port on the USLP2 in the SLPU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1093
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Figure 14-58 Installing the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable
bind it.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1094
DBS3900
Installation Guide

ties to bind it.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
14.9.2 Repainting.

1095
DBS3900
Installation Guide


No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
1096

DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

1097

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1098

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
APM30H
(Ver.B)
cabinets
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
APM30H
(Ver.C)
cabinets
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
APM30H
(Ver.D)
cabinets
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1099

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1100
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Component
APM30H
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
Battery
cabinet
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1101

DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1102

DBS3900
Installation Guide

Procedure
(1) Fireproof mud
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1103

DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
----End
14.9.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1104

DBS3900
Installation Guide
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1105

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
15

Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)
About This Chapter

the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1106
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1107

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1108
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
NOTE
NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1109
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
in. to 4.49 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1110
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
to 4.49 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1111
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1112

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide


Installing the Base

concrete floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1113

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
Procedure
1.
2.
(1) Wall
3.
CAUTION
drilling holes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1114

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
(1) M12x60 bolts
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
1.
(2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
them in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1115
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
CAUTION
1.
as reference.
2.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1116

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Spacer
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1117
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
figure.
1.
2.
side one by one.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1118

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l

NOTE

Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1119

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1120

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
is not required.
hole
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1121
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
(3) Pole
(4) Bolt
(5) Spring washer
(6) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1122

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1123

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1124
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
following figure.
(1) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut
1125

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
NOTE
Procedure
figure.
(1) Anchor points
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1126
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
1.
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
3.
4.
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1127

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1128

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Bar
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1129

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1130

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Context
TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)

1131

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
TMC11H (Ver.C).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.039 in.2)

and yellow
Equipotential
cable
stacked cabinets
side
TMC11H (Ver.D).
Cable
OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1132

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
NOTE
15-36.
(2) PGND cable
(3) Ground busbar
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1133

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1134

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1135

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1136

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1137

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1138

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1139

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1140

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1141

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
If...
Then...

(Ver.C) is used
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1142

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1143

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1144

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
1.
cable route.
2.
the wires.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1145

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1146

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) AC heater
(2) SOU
Procedure

If...
Then...
Perform Step 2.1
Perform Step 2.2
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1147

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
15-64.
a.
b.
c.
respectively.
d.
e.
to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).

1148

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1149

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
EMUA/EMUB
Black
Procedure
If...
Then...
Go toStep 2.
Go toStep 3.
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1150

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1151

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1152

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Base Station
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Method of
Adding the
Connector
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable

1.
2.
following table.
Base Station
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Application
Scenario
Power
Equipment
Installation
Position
BTS3900A (Ver.D) -
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D).
DCDU-12B
DC output terminal
LOAD8
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
DCDU-11C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
DCDU-12B
BTS3900A (Ver.B)
DCDU-03C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.B).
DCDU-03B

DC output terminal
LOAD7
1153
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
3.
4.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1154

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
4.
----End

Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1155
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1156
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1157

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(2) Support
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1158

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) BBU
(2) GPS support

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1159

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1160

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1161
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1162
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1163

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1164

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1165

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1166

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1167
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
NOTE
in the upper IBBS.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1168

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

cabinets


batteries
NOTE
(0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in).
(0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1169

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE

----End


Context
power cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1170

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipme
nt
Cable
Color
One End
The
Other
End
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03
B
DCDU-03
B power
cable
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT
terminal
(M6, 4
mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
Dependin
g on the
external
equipment
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11
B
DCDU-11
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12
B
DCDU-12
B power
cables
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT
terminals
[M6, 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) for one
group of
power
cables or
16 mm2
(0.025 in.
2) for two
groups of
power
cables]
Procedure
1.
2.
NOTE
1.
2.
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1171
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-0
3B
BBU
power
cable
RTN(+)
wire
Color
Black
Bent by
90

3V3 connector
1172
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
Cabinet
Type
Power
Equipm
ent
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-1
1B
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-1
2B
Cable
BBU
power
cables
BBU
power
cables
Color
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
degrees,
OT
terminals
(M4, 6
mm2 or
0.009 in.
2)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
RTN(+)
wire
Black
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
EPC4
connector
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

Cable.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(1).

1173

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

1.2 Nm (10.61 lbfin.), as
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Figure 15-91.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Figure 15-92.
NOTE
CAUTION
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1174
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1175
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
Figure 15-92.
1.
2.
UPEU in the BBU.
3.
on the EPU.
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
(Ver.D).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet
Type
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
Cable
TMC11
H
(Ver.B)
DCD
U-03B
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
or 0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending
on the port
on the RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)

1176
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
Cabinet
Type
TMC11
H
(Ver.C)
Powe
r
Equi
pmen
t
DCD
U-11B
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
RTN
(+)
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
The Other
End
Tool-less female
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
DCD
U-12B
RRU
power
cable
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
(complyi
ng with
the North
American
standard)
EPC5 connector
Brown
(complyi
ng with
the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Blue

1177

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Procedure
end.
1.
2.
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
Method of Adding a
Connector
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

the DCDU Side.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

Cable(2).
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

Cable(2).

1.
NOTE
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1178
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
3.
(10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1179
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
NOTE
CAUTION
following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.B)
DCDU-03B

in Figure 15-95.

1180

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cabinet Type
Power Equipment
TMC11H (Ver.C)
DCDU-11B

one of the LOAD0 to
LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 15-96.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
DCDU-12B

LOAD5 ports on the
Figure 15-97.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1181

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


transfer cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1182

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1183
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

Prerequisites
NOTICE
Context
l
as an example.
Procedure
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1184

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

transfer cable.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1185

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1186

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
the shield layer.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1187

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
at the other end.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1188

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1189
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
2.
3.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1190

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(1) Maximum rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1191

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1192
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1193

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
l
When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must
If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure, another
If a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added into
the added TMC11H, and the added BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For
the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the
TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1194

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 15-111 One TMC11H expanded to two TMC11Hs
Procedure
Step 1 Install the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in a TMC11H, as shown in the following figure.
1.
CMUA in the TMC11H.
2.
the UPEU in the BBU of the TMC11H.
Figure 15-112 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in the TMC11H
Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs, another
monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU
of the original TMC11H.
2.
in the added TMC11H.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1195

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 15-113 Installing the monitoring signal cable between two TMC11Hs
bind them.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1196

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1197

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
NOTICE
respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1198

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


No.
Item
design.
15.10.2 Repainting.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1199
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

No.
Item

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1200
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
No.
Item
13

No.
Item
the same direction.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1201
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)

Prerequisites
l
Context
NOTICE

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DCDU-03B or
DCDU-03C

equipment.)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1202
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DCDU-11B or
DCDU-11C

TMC11H
(Ver.D)
DCDU-12B or
DCDU-12C
NOTE

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1203

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1204

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER

Cabinet
Component
TMC11H
Fan assembly
Fan in the
front door
RRU
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1205

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End


Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1206

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Fireproof mud
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1207

TMC11H (Ver.B)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
15.10.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1208
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TMC11H (Ver.B)
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1209

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
16
Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
About This Chapter

This section describes the process for installing an OMB (Ver.C), components in the OMB
(Ver.C), and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is
installed in an OMB (Ver.C).
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing the OMB and IBBS20D on a
pole or a wall.
This section describes the process for installing the BBU in an OMB.
16.3 Installing an OMB
This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole and on
a wall.
16.4 Installing the BBU
16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector
onsite.
After the cabinets and devices are all installed, you need to check the installation items,
installation environment, and cable-related items.
16.9 Repainting
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1210
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
be repaired.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1211

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the clearance requirements for installing the OMB and IBBS20D on a
pole or a wall.
Clearance Requirements for Installation on a Pole

An OMB can be installed on a pole at a height less than or equal to 10 m (32.81 ft).
The diameter of the pole ranges from 60 mm (2.36 in.) to 114 mm (4.49 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a pole.
Figure 16-1 Clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a pole
Clearance Requirements for Installation on a Wall

The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a wall.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1212
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
Figure 16-2 Clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a wall

This section describes the process for installing the BBU in an OMB.
The following figure shows the installation process.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1213

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides.
l The outdoor cable conversion box (OCB) is used to connect cables with different cross-sectional areas,
and it is optional. For details about an OCB, see the OCB User Guide.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1214
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

a wall.
16.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole.
Context
l
The diameter of a pole is 60 mm to 114 mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.).
Procedure
Step 1 Install the upper bracket assembly on a pole, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers, flat washers, and bracket assemblies in
sequence, and then use a torque wrench to secure them until the tightening torque reaches
28 Nm (247.81 lbfin.).
2.
Use a level to check whether the bracket assemblies are on a horizontal plane.
NOTE
When securing the upper or lower bracket assemblies, you need to secure two bolts alternatively. After the
main and auxiliary brackets are secured properly, measure the space between the brackets on both sides
and ensure that the space is the same on the two sides.
Figure 16-4 Installing the upper bracket assembly
(1) Auxiliary bracket
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Main bracket
(3) Flat washers
(4) Spring washers

(5) M10x110 bolts
1215

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Put M10x40 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the back
mounting plate onto the main bracket of the lower bracket assembly until the tightening torque
reaches 28 Nm (247.81 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16-5 Installing a back mounting plate on the lower bracket assembly
mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly until the tightening torque
Figure 16-6 Installing the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket
assembly
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1216

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the
auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly onto the main bracket until the tightening torque
Figure 16-7 Installing the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly
Step 5 Align the hooks on the OMB cabinet with the slots in the back mounting plate, hook the cabinet
onto the brackets, use M6x16 screws to secure the back mounting plate to the attachment plate
at the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 16-8 Installing an OMB
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1217

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
16.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a wall.
Context
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Mark four anchor points according to the installation holes in the back mounting plate, and use
a level to check whether the line between upper anchor points and the line between lower anchor
points are horizontal, as shown in the following figure.
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1218

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 16-10 Installing the expansion bolts
(1) M10x60 bolt
1.
(2) Spring washer
(3) Plastic tube
(4) Flat washer
(5) Expansion tube
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
Wear a mask or take other measures to protect your eyes against the dust.
NOTE
The depth of holes should be within the range of 52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.). Otherwise,
expansion bolts cannot be installed or secured properly.
2.
3.
Partially tighten each expansion bolts, place it vertically into the hole, and use a rubber
mallet to pound it until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.
4.
Securely tighten the expansion bolt.
5.
Loosen the expansion bolt, and remove the M10x60 bolt, spring washer, plastic tube, and
flat washer in sequence.
NOTE
After removing the expansion bolt from the wall, dispose of the plastic tube.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1219

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Align the installation holes in the back mounting plate with the holes in the wall, secure the back
mounting plate onto the wall until the tightening torque reaches 28 Nm (247.82 lbfin.), as shown
Figure 16-11 Installing the back mounting plate
following figure.
Figure 16-12 Installing an OMB on a wall
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1220

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1221

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
or IMB03.

1222

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1223

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1224

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1225

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1226

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector

Context
Procedure
following figure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1227
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Step 4 Use two M4 screws to install a surge protection support onto the bottom of the OMB, and tighten
the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1228
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
Figure 16-26 Installing the support
Step 5 Install the GPS clock signal cable on the support, partially tighten the connector at one end of
the clock signal cable by hands, and then use a torque wrench to tighten the connector to 1 Nm
Figure 16-27 Partially tightening the GPS clock signal cable
Step 6 Install the GPS surge protector, connect the GPS clock signal cable and GPS jumper to the
Protect and Surge ports on the GPS surge protector, respectively, and waterproof the connectors,
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1229

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 16-28 Installing the GPS clock signal cable and GPS jumper
Step 7 Prepare a PGND cable for the GPS surge protector.

1.
2.
Add an M6 OT terminal to one end of the cable and an M8 OT terminal to the other end
of the cable, as shown in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 8 Connect M8 OT end of the PGND cable to the ground terminal on the surge protector and M6
OT end to the ground terminal on the OMB, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
It is recommended that the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector is routed and bound in the way shown
Figure 16-29 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1230

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1231
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

l

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1232
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1233

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1234

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1235

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1236

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

This section describes the procedures for removing and installing cable outlet modules at the
bottom of an OMB.
Context
During cable layout, you need to remove the cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB,
route the cable through a cable hole in the cable outlet module, and then reinstall the cable outlet
module at the bottom of the OMB for effective sealing.
NOTE
The procedure for installing the cable outlet module on the bottom left side is the same as that on the bottom
right side. The following description is based on the cable outlet module on the bottom right side.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1237

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable outlet modules are installed on the bottom left and right sides of the OMB, as shown
in Figure 16-38.
Figure 16-38 Position of cable outlet modules
There are multiple cable holes in each cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB.
Figure 16-39 shows the cable holes in the left cable outlet module, and Figure 16-40 shows
the cable holes in the right cable outlet module.
Figure 16-39 Cable holes in the left cable outlet module
(1) Cable holes for CPRI fiber optic cables
(2) Cable holes for RF jumpers
(7) Cable hole for the alarm cable
(3) Cable hole for the GPS clock signal cable (8) Cable hole for the monitoring signal cable for an outer
air circulation fan
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(4) Cable hole for the alarm cable
(9) Reserved
(5) Cable holes for the transmission cables

1238

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 16-40 Cable holes in the right cable outlet module
(1) Cable holes for DC input power cables
(2) Cable holes for DC input power cables
(3) Reserved
(4) RRU power cables
(5) Cable hole for an AC input power cable
NOTE
In the DC scenario, a group of power cables are used when three RRUs are installed and two groups
of power cables are used when six RRUs are installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the bolts and baffle plate from the cable outlet module, and then remove the cable outlet
module from the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, as shown in Figure 16-41.
NOTICE
The bolt must be stored properly after it is removed and be reinstalled after the cables are routed.
Figure 16-41 Removing the cable outlet module
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1239

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Remove the rubber plugs from the corresponding cable holes according to the labels near the
cable holes, and lead the cables through the cable holes.
Step 3 Place the cable outlet module in the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, and reinstall the
baffle plate and bolts, as shown in Figure 16-42.
Figure 16-42 Installing the cable outlet module
----End
16.6.3 Installing a PGND Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a PGND cable.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable between an OMB and an OMB
(Ver.C).
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
PGND cable
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install the PGND cables for an OMB, and an OMB (Ver.C), as shown in Figure 16-43, and
Figure 16-44, respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1240

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar at the bottom of the OMB/OMB
(Ver.C), and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
2.
Route the other end of the PGND cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet module at
the bottom to the external ground bar.
NOTE
For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. For
how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB (Ver.C), see 16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.
Figure 16-43 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB
Figure 16-44 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB (Ver.C)
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1241

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Installing Input Power Cable for the OMB

The input power cable for the OMB feeds power into the components in the OMB from the
external power equipment.
Context
The input power cable is classified into the DC input power cable and the AC input power cable,
Table 16-2 Specifications of the input power cable
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Depending on the
external power
equipment
DC input
power
cable
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
AC input
power
cable
Brown
Blue
PE
Green and yellow
OT terminal (M4,
4 mm2 or 0.006
in.2)
NOTE
Procedure
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Install the DC input power cable.

1.
2.
Route the cable into the cabinet through the cable outlet module.
3.
Add OT terminals at one end of the cable according to the instructions in Table
16-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
4.
Connect one end of the DC input power cable to the external input terminals NEG(-)
and RTN(+) on the PDU10D-01, and connect the other end of the cable to the external
power equipment, as shown in the following figure.

1242
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
Figure 16-45 Installing the DC input power cable
5.
Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind it.
6.
Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying

Label.
Install the AC input power cable.

1.
2.
Add OT terminals at one end of the cable according to the instructions in Table
16-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
3.
Route the cable into the cabinet through the cable outlet module.
4.
Connect one end of the cable to the external AC input terminals L, N, and PE on the
PDU10D-01, and connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment,
Figure 16-46 Installing the AC input power cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1243

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
5.
Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind it.
6.

Label.
----End

This section describes how to install a BBU power cable which feeds -48 V DC power into a
BBU.
Context
Cable
One End
The Other End
BBU power
cable
3V3 connector
EPC4 connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the EPC4 connector on the BBU power cable from the PDU10D-01.
CAUTION
The EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable has been connected to the power
equipment before delivery. You need to remove the connector from the power equipment before
connecting the connector to the BBU. Operations in the reverse sequence may cause personal
injury.
Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector on the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU,
and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1244

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Reconnect the EPC4 connector on the BBU power cable to the original position on the
PDU10D-01.
bind them.
----End

This section describes how to install an RRU power cable which feeds power into an RRU from
the power equipment.
Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a torque screwdriver, a utility knife, a cable cutter, and a multipurpose crimping tool.
Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1245
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

Cable
RRU power
cable
RTN
(+)
Color
One End
The Other End
Black(North
American)
EPC5 connector
Depending on the
port on the RRU
Brown(European)
NEG
(-)
Blue
NOTE
l The type of connector at the other end of an RRU power cable depends on the model of the RRU to
which the power cable is connected. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related
RRU installation guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
Step 2 Route the RRU power cable into the OMB through a cable outlet module.
Step 3 At the position 50 mm (1.97 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip 40 mm (1.57 in.) long
jacket off the cables at the end to be connected to the PDU10D-01 to expose the shield layers.
Step 4 Add EPC5 connector to the end of the RRU power cables to be connected to the PDU10D-01
following the instructions in Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Twist the shield layers of the RRU power cable into one strand, thread the strand of shield layers
through the ground clip, and tighten the M4 screws on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.),
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1246
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
(1) Shield layer
Step 6 Add correct connectors to the RRU power cables and connect the connectors to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cables to LOAD0 to LOAD5
ports on the PDU10D-01, as shown in Figure 16-49.
NOTE
A PDU10D-01 can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs. An RRU power cable can be connected to
any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the PDU10D-01.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1247

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 16-49 Installing RRU power cables
bind them.
----End


Prerequisites
l
The procedure for installing E1/T1 cables in an AC OMB is the same as that in a DC OMB,
and for detailed procedures, see the following steps.
This section describes procedure for installing the E1/T1 cables in a GU base station using
separate transmission. For cable connections for the E1/T1 Ethernet in other types of base
stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections' in 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1248

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an OUTSIDE port on the UELP in the
BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet module on the bottom left of the
OMB cabinet, and connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. For details about
installing the cable outlet module.
bind them.
----End

Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UFLP is configured as an example. For details
about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections"
in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
The procedure for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable in an AC OMB is the same as that
in a DC OMB.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the OUTSIDE
silkscreen on the UFLP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1249

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 At a position 50 mm (1.79 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip a length of 40 mm (1.57
in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose the shield layer. Route the cable through the
the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1250

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cable outlet module on the bottom
left of the cabinet, and connect the cable to the external transmission equipment.
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
This section describes the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a GU base
station using separate transmission mode. For FE/GE fiber optic cable connections in base
stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an AC OMB and a DC OMB are
the same.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1251

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Insert the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in the following figure.
Step 3 Route the FE/GE fiber optic cables along the left side of the OMB, out of the OMB through the
cable outlet module, and to the external transmission equipment.
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1252

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
16.6.6 Installing an HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

This section describes the procedure for installing a monitoring signal cable between the HEUB
and BBU.
Context
The following description uses the DC OMB as an example. The procedure is the same for
installing an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable in an AC OMB.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU
in the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16-56 Installing the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
NOTE
The RJ45 connector at the HEUB end of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed before
delivery.
bind it.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1253

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
ties to bind it.
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI fiber optic cables which transmit CPRI
signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Context
l
labeled as MM.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1254

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Lay out the CPRI fiber optic cables along the inner left side of the cabinet, route them out
of the cabinet from the cable module on the bottom of the cabinet, and to corresponding
RRUs.
3.
Install the same type of optical modules on the CPRI ports of the RRU and BBU side.
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
optic cables, and insert the connectors into the optical module in the RRU.

1255

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected
to the TX and RX ports on the RRU, respectively.
Figure 16-61 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables
bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1256

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cabinets.
No.
Check Item
design.
If the cabinet is installed on a wall, the holes in mounting ears fit the holes for
expansion bolts, and the mounting ears are secured on the wall evenly and steadily.
If the cabinet is installed on a pole, the mounting bracket is securely installed.
The horizontal deviation of the cabinet is smaller than 3 mm (0.12 in.), and the
vertical deviation is smaller than or equal to 3 mm (0.12 in.).
All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened. Both the
spring washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired.
Filler panels are installed in the space reserved for customer equipment.
The locks of the doors on the cabinet work properly, and the stop bolt is secured.
10

The following table lists the standards for checking the environment of installed cabinets.
No.
Check Item
The cabinet surface is clean.
All devices around the cabinet are neat and clean.

The following table lists the standards for checking the electrical connections of installed
cabinets.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1257
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

No.
Item
The PGND cable is securely connected, the AC input power cables and cables in
the cabinet are correctly connected, and the screws are tightened according to the
electrical design of the power system. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.
The redundant part of the power cable or the PGND cable is cut off rather than
coiled.
The terminals at both ends of the power cable or the PGND cable are securely
soldered or crimped.
The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are coated
with heat shrink tubing.
The flat washers and the spring washers are well mounted on all OT terminals. The
contact surfaces of the OT terminals are not distorted.

The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.
Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber
optic cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are separately bound. The
distance between each two types of cables is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The cable layout facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion, and the
maintenance transfer cable is bound to a cable holder near the BBU.
All vacant ports are properly protected.

1258

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid the abnormal voltage standing
wave ratio (VSWR) caused by false connection.
BBU Hardware Installation Checklist

The following table lists the standards for checking the installed BBU hardware.
Table 16-9 BBU hardware installation checklist
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Check Item
All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters and
no cables are connected in series or in parallel. There should not be any switch
or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed. One terminal on
the ground bar is connected to only one PGND cable.
coiled.
The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are
coated with heat shrink tubing.
The contact surfaces of the OT terminals are not distorted.
All the cable connectors, including those at the bottom of the cabinet interior,
are securely connected.
The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and
face the same direction.
Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables, feeders,
fiber optic cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are separately bound.
The distance between each two types of cables is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The cable layout facilitates maintenance and capacity expansion, and the
bending radius of the cable meets the requirements.
10
11
The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are
smooth without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20
in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
12

1259

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
External input power cables for the OMB (Ver.C) are correctly connected.
The power supply to the OMB (Ver.C) meets the power system requirements.
The external power supply to the OMB (Ver.C) are shut off.
All circuit breakers in the OMB (Ver.C) are set to OFF.
Circuit breakers on the BBU are set to OFF.
Boards, modules, and cables are installed in the cabinet.
Context
NOTICE
DANGER
Table 16-10 Circuit breakers in an OMB (Ver.C)

Cabinet
Power Device
Circuit Breaker
OMB
(Ver.C)
ETP48100-A1 or
PDU10D-01
l LOAD0/LOAD1 on the ETP48100-A1

controls power outputs.
Operation Procedure
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the DC OMB
(Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1260
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
Figure 16-62 Power-on check process for the DC-powered OMB (Ver.C)
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the AC OMB
(Ver.C).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1261

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 16-63 Power-on check process for the AC-powered OMB (Ver.C)
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the OMB (Ver.C).
Step 3 Set the circuit breaker on the ETP48100-A1 to ON.
Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply to
components in the cabinet according to the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1262
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)

Cabinet
Component
OMB (Ver.C)
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
BBU

for 1s).
0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The
CPRI indicator is not steady red.a
RRU subrack
RRU

a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is
broken. In this case, check the optical module or fiber optic cable.
NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1263

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
16.9 Repainting
be repaired.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1264

(Ver.C)
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Prerequisites
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1265
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(Ver.C)
figures.
NOTICE
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1266
DBS3900
Installation Guide
17
Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in an OMB
About This Chapter

A BBU can be installed in an OMB in outdoor AC and DC scenarios. This section describes the
process for installing an OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables.
This section describes the recommended installation clearance and minimum clearance
requirements for in stalling an OMB.
When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors and the BBU is installed in an OMB, you need to
install the OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables onsite. Some optional components
may also need to be installed based on site requirements.
a wall.
onsite.
17.8 Repainting
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1267
DBS3900
Installation Guide
be repaired.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1268
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the recommended installation clearance and minimum clearance
requirements for in stalling an OMB.
Recommended Installation Clearances

The following figure shows the recommended clearance requirements for installing an OMB.
Figure 17-1 Recommended installation clearances
Minimum Installation Clearances

Figure 17-2 shows the minimum clearances for installing an OMB.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1269
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-2 Minimum installation clearances

When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors and the BBU is installed in an OMB, you need to
install the OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables onsite. Some optional components
may also need to be installed based on site requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1270
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l For details about how to install an AAU, see the related AAU installation guides.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1271
DBS3900
Installation Guide

a wall.
17.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole.
Context
l
The diameter of a pole is 60 mm to 114 mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.).
Procedure
Step 1 Install the upper bracket assembly on a pole, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers, flat washers, and bracket assemblies in
sequence, and then use a torque wrench to secure them until the tightening torque reaches
28 Nm (247.81 lbfin.).
2.
Use a level to check whether the bracket assemblies are on a horizontal plane.
NOTE
When securing the upper or lower bracket assemblies, you need to secure two bolts alternatively. After the
main and auxiliary brackets are secured properly, measure the space between the brackets on both sides
and ensure that the space is the same on the two sides.
Figure 17-4 Installing the upper bracket assembly
(1) Auxiliary bracket
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Main bracket
(3) Flat washers
(4) Spring washers

(5) M10x110 bolts
1272
DBS3900
Installation Guide
mounting plate onto the main bracket of the lower bracket assembly until the tightening torque
Figure 17-5 Installing a back mounting plate on the lower bracket assembly
mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly until the tightening torque
Figure 17-6 Installing the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket
assembly
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1273
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the
auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly onto the main bracket until the tightening torque
Figure 17-7 Installing the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly
following figure.
Figure 17-8 Installing an OMB
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1274
DBS3900
Installation Guide
17.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a wall.
Context
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Mark four anchor points according to the installation holes in the back mounting plate, and use
a level to check whether the line between upper anchor points and the line between lower anchor
points are horizontal, as shown in the following figure.
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1275
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-10 Installing the expansion bolts
(1) M10x60 bolt
1.
(2) Spring washer
(3) Plastic tube
(4) Flat washer
(5) Expansion tube
60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
Wear a mask or take other measures to protect your eyes against the dust.
NOTE
The depth of holes should be within the range of 52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.). Otherwise,
expansion bolts cannot be installed or secured properly.
2.
3.
Partially tighten each expansion bolts, place it vertically into the hole, and use a rubber
mallet to pound it until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.
4.
Securely tighten the expansion bolt.
5.
Loosen the expansion bolt, and remove the M10x60 bolt, spring washer, plastic tube, and
flat washer in sequence.
NOTE
After removing the expansion bolt from the wall, dispose of the plastic tube.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1276
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Align the installation holes in the back mounting plate with the holes in the wall, secure the back
mounting plate onto the wall until the tightening torque reaches 28 Nm (247.82 lbfin.), as shown
Figure 17-11 Installing the back mounting plate
following figure.
Figure 17-12 Installing an OMB on a wall
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1277
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1278
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
or IMB03.

1279
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1280
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1281
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1282
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1283
DBS3900
Installation Guide

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1284
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1285
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1286
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1287
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1288
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1289
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

During cable layout, you need to remove the cable outlet modules at the bottom of the OMB,
route the cables through the cable holes in the cable outlet module, and then reinstall the cable
outlet modules at the bottom of the OMB for effective sealing.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable outlet modules are installed on the bottom left and the bottom right of the OMB, as

1290
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-32 Position of cable outlet modules
There are multiple cable holes in each cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB.
Figure 17-33 shows the cable holes in the left cable outlet module, and Figure 17-34 shows
the cable holes in the right cable outlet module.
Figure 17-33 Cable holes in the left cable outlet module
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1291
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-34 Cable holes in the right cable outlet module
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the bolt and baffle plate from the cable outlet module, and then remove the cable outlet
module from the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17-35 Removing the cable outlet module
Step 2 Remove the rubber plugs from the corresponding cable holes according to the labels near the
cable holes, and route the cables through the cable holes.
Step 3 Place the cable outlet module in the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, and reinstall the
baffle plate and the bolt, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1292
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-36 Installing the cable outlet module
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a PGND cable.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable between an OMB and an OMB
(Ver.C).
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
PGND cable
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install the PGND cables for an OMB, and an OMB (Ver.C), as shown in Figure 17-37, and
Figure 17-38, respectively.
1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar at the bottom of the OMB/OMB
(Ver.C), and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
2.
Route the other end of the PGND cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet module at
the bottom to the external ground bar.
NOTE
For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. For
how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB (Ver.C), see 16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1293
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-37 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB
Figure 17-38 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB (Ver.C)
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1294
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installing Input Power Cables for the OMB

Input power cables for the OMB feed the external power into the components in the OMB. The
cables consist of the EPS30-4815AF power cable and DCDU-03B power cables according to
different power equipment.
Context
When an OMB uses 220 V AC single-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire, the EPS30-4815AF
supplies power to the components in the OMB. In this case, the AC input power cable is listed
in the following table.
Table 17-3 Specifications of the input power cable for the OMB
Cable
One End
The Other End
Color
EPS30-4815AF power
cable in a 220 V AC
OT terminal
(M6, 2.5 mm2 or
0.004 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
Black cable with three

wires (blue, brown, and
green and yellow)
EPS30-4815AF power
cable in a 110 V AC duallive-wire scenario
Black cable with four

wires (black, red, white,
and green)
When an OMB uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-03B supplies power to the components in the
OMB. In this case, the DC input power cables are listed in the following table.
Table 17-4 Specifications of DCDU-03B power cables
Cable
DCDU-03B
power cables
(-48 V)
RTN
(+)
NEG
(-)
One End
The Other End
Color
OT terminal
(M6, 16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
Black
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare DCDU-03B power cables.
1.
2.
Add OT terminals at each end of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1295
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Install the EPS30-4815AF power cable or DCDU-03B power cables.

l In AC scenarios, when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied to the OMB, the OT
terminals at the blue, brown, and green and yellow wires of the EPS30-4815AF power cable
are connected to the external input terminals N, L, and PE, as shown in Figure 17-41.
l When the DC power is supplied to the OMB, the OT terminals at one end of the DCDU-03B
power cables are connected to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals on the DCDU-03B, as
Figure 17-41 Installing the EPS30-4815AF power cable
Figure 17-42 Installing the DCDU-03B power cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1296
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Route the other end of the power cable through the cable outlet module on the bottom right side
of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external power equipment. For details about
how to install a cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.
bind them.
----End

This section describes how to install BBU power cables in an OMB in AC and DC scenarios.
Context
Cable
Power
Equipmen
t
One End
The Other End
Color
BBU power cable (in an

AC-powered OMB)
EPS30-481
5AF
H4
connector
3V3 connector
BBU power
cable (in a
DC-powered
OMB)
DCDU-03B
3V3
connector
0.009 in.2)
Black
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Install the BBU power cable in an AC-powered OMB, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on
the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21
lbfin.).
2.
Connect the other 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the DC INPUT
port on the HEUA.
3.
Connect the H4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD1
port on the EPS30-4815AF.
1297
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-43 Installing a BBU power cable (in an AC-powered OMB)
4.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use
5.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped

Label.
Install the BBU power cable in a DC-powered OMB, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Add OT terminals to the BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. OT
terminals must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2.
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black wire at the other end of the BBU
power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals, respectively, near the LOAD6
silkscreen on the DCDU-03B.
NOTE
When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power
equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power
cables are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors
(pressfit type) at the other end are connected to the LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports on the
DCDU-03B.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1298
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-44 Installing BBU power cables (in a DC-powered OMB)
4.
5.

Label.
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU power cables in the OMB in AC and
DC scenarios.
Context
The specifications of an RRU power cable are the same when the EPS30-4815AF or the
DCDU-03B supplies power to the RRUs, as shown in the following table.
Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Color
One End
The Other End
terminals (M4, 3.3 mm2 or
0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending on the port

on the RRU
RRU
power
cable
(North
America
n
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cable
(Europea
n
standard)
RTN
(+)
Brown
NEG
(-)
Blue
terminals (M4, 4 mm2 or 0.006
in.2)

1299
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Add OT terminals to the blue and black (or brown) wires of the RRU power cable on the
power equipment side, as shown in Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on
the DCDU Side.
3.
Prepare the OT terminal or tool-less female connector (pressfit type) on the power cable
on the RRU side based on the type of power port on the RRU. For details, see the related
RRU installation guide.
Step 3 In the position 20 cm (7.87 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip the jacket for about 40
the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1300
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the power
equipment.
l In an AC-powered OMB, connect the OT terminals on the blue and black (or brown) wires
of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals on the PDU of the EPS30-4815AF,
respectively, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in Figure
17-47.
l In a DC-powered OMB, connect the OT terminals on the blue and black (or brown) wires to
the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B
respectively, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in Figure
17-47.
NOTE
l When 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied and an EPS30-4815AF

is used, only one multimode RRU is supported.
l No surge protection is required for DC power supply. In this case, the maximum length of an RRU
power cable is 5 m (16.4 ft.).
l When -48 V DC power is supplied, three DC multimode RRUs are supported, and the RRU power
cables can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1301
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-47 Installing an RRU power cable in an AC-powered OMB
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1302
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-48 Installing an RRU power cable in a DC-powered OMB
bind them.
----End


The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and surge protection
unit for transferring surge protection signals.
Context
This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station as an
example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1303
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Install the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the DB26 connector at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the
E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, UTRP, or WMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the
plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the DB25 connector at the other end of the E1/T1 cable to the INSIDE port on the
UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
bind them.
----End

When the DBS3900 is applied to the outdoor scenario and the BBU is installed in the OMB, the
E1/T1 cables connect the surge protection unit and the external transmission equipment to
transmit the E1/T1 signals.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1304
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Prerequisites
CAUTION
Ensure that both ends of the E1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then solder a
This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station as an
example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable
Procedure
Step 1 Install the E1/T1 cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the DB26 male connector at one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on
the UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21
lbfin.).
2.
Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet module
on the bottom right of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission
equipment. For details about installing the cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable
Outlet Modules.
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1305
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and UFLP for
transferring surge protection signals.
Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station
as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section
"Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
An UFLPb applies only to the LTE mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the
FE/GE0 port on the UMPT/LMPT or to the FE/GE port on the UTRP.
2.
Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/
GE1 port near the INSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPB.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1306
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

When the DBS3900 is applied to the outdoor scenario, the FE/GE Ethernet cables connect the
surge protection unit and the external transmission equipment to transmit the FE/GE signals.
Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For cable
connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series
Base Station Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the FE/GE Ethernet cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the
OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPb in the BBU.
2.
Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet
module on the bottom right of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external
transmission equipment. For details about installing the cable outlet module, see 17.5.2
Installing Cable Outlet Modules.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1307
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Install a ground clip onto the FE/GE Ethernet cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Strip a length of 40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable at the position 200
mm (7.81 in.) away from the cable outlet module to expose the shield layer.
2.
Loosen the screw on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.
3.
Attach the ground clip to the shield layer of the FE/GE Ethernet cable and tighten the M4
screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1308
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in BTS900A Hardware Description.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1309
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the
cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1310
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Route the FE/GE fiber optic cables along the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the
cabinet, out of the cabinet, and to the external transmission equipment. For details about how to
install a cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.
bind them.
----End
17.5.6 Installing an HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

When the BBU is installed in the OMB, you need to install only one HEUA-BBU monitoring
signal cable onsite.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM IN port on the
HEUA on the OMB door.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1311
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-57 Installing the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
bind it.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1312
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1313
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
NOTICE
respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1314
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
17.5.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable

A GPS clock signal cable transmits GPS clock signals received from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1315
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1316
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Step 4 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6, as shown
NOTE
If the LMPT or UMPTa6 is configured in the BBU, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1317
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-64 Installing the GPS clock signal cable
bind them.
----End


The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cabinets.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Check Item
design.
If the cabinet is installed on a wall, the holes in mounting ears fit the holes for
expansion bolts, and the mounting ears are secured on the wall evenly and steadily.
If the cabinet is installed on a pole, the mounting bracket is securely installed.
The horizontal deviation of the cabinet is smaller than 3 mm (0.12 in.), and the
vertical deviation is smaller than or equal to 3 mm (0.12 in.).
All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened. Both the
spring washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired.
Filler panels are installed in the space reserved for customer equipment.
The locks of the doors on the cabinet work properly, and the stop bolt is secured.
1318
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Check Item
10

The following table lists the standards for checking the environment of installed cabinets.
No.
Check Item
The cabinet surface is clean.
All devices around the cabinet are neat and clean.

The following table lists the standards for checking the electrical connections of installed
cabinets.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
The PGND cable is securely connected, the AC input power cables and cables in
the cabinet are correctly connected, and the screws are tightened according to the
electrical design of the power system. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.
coiled.
The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are coated
with heat shrink tubing.
The flat washers and the spring washers are well mounted on all OT terminals. The
contact surfaces of the OT terminals are not distorted.

1319
DBS3900
Installation Guide

The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cables.
No.
Item
the same direction.
Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber
optic cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are separately bound. The
distance between each two types of cables is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The cable layout facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion, and the
maintenance transfer cable is bound to a cable holder near the BBU.
The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid the abnormal voltage standing
wave ratio (VSWR) caused by false connection.
BBU Hardware Installation Checklist

The following table lists the standards for checking the installed BBU hardware.
Table 17-11 BBU hardware installation checklist
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Check Item
All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters and
no cables are connected in series or in parallel. There should not be any switch
or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed. One terminal on
the ground bar is connected to only one PGND cable.
coiled.
The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are
coated with heat shrink tubing.
1320
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Check Item
The contact surfaces of the OT terminals are not distorted.
All the cable connectors, including those at the bottom of the cabinet interior,
are securely connected.
The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and
face the same direction.
Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables, feeders,
fiber optic cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are separately bound.
The distance between each two types of cables is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The cable layout facilitates maintenance and capacity expansion, and the
bending radius of the cable meets the requirements.
10
11
The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are
smooth without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20
in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
12

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the OMB are correctly connected.
The power supply to the OMB meets the requirements of the power system.
The external power supply to the OMB has been shut off.
All circuit breakers in the OMB have been set to OFF.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1321
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
NOTICE
Table 17-12 Circuit breakers in an OMB

Cabinet
Power Device
Circuit Breaker
OMB
EPS30-4815AF,
DCDU-05, or
DCDU-03B
l RRU and TM circuit breakers on the DCDU-05

(The circuit breakers control the power input to
the RRU and customer transmission
equipment.)
equipment.)
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the OMB.
Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the DCDU-05 to ON, and check the power supply status of each
component.
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1322
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Component
OMB
PMU
PSU

Fan assembly
BBU

for 1s).
RRU subrack
RRU

NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1323
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
Example
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the DC-powered
OMB.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1324
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-65 Power-on process for the DC-powered OMB
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the AC-powered
OMB.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1325
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 17-66 Power-on process for the AC-powered OMB
17.8 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U

1326
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
figures.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1327
DBS3900
Installation Guide
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1328
DBS3900
Installation Guide
18

Installed on a Wall
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the process for installing a BBU, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B, and related cables in an indoor wall-mounted scenario.
In an indoor scenario with DC power supply, a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B can be installed on a wall. In this case, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
supplies power to the BBU.
In an indoor wall-mounted scenario, the installation process includes installing components on
the wall and installing cables.
18.3 Installing Components on a Wall
This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU on a wall.
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1329
DBS3900
Installation Guide

In an indoor scenario with DC power supply, a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B can be installed on a wall. In this case, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
supplies power to the BBU.
Installation Clearance Requirements for a Single Wall-Mounted BBU

The following figure shows the installation clearance requirements for a wall-mounted BBU.
Figure 18-1 Installation clearance requirements for a single wall-mounted BBU
NOTE
l Retain a minimum of 600 mm (23.62 in.) in front of the BBU for maintenance.
l Retain a minimum of 20 mm (0.79 in.) above the BBU for maintenance.
l Retain a minimum of 800 mm (31.50 in.) below the BBU for maintenance.
l Retain a minimum of 50 mm (1.97 in.) on the left and right of the BBU respectively for maintenance.
Installation Clearance Requirements for a Wall-Mounted BBU and a DCDU-03B

or DCDU-11B
If a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall, a minimum of
100 mm (3.93 in.) must be reserved between them for maintenance, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B must be installed close to the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1330
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-2 Installation clearance requirements for a wall-mounted BBU and a DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B

In an indoor wall-mounted scenario, the installation process includes installing components on
the wall and installing cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1331
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l For details about how to install an AAU, see the related AAU installation guides.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1332
DBS3900
Installation Guide
18.3 Installing Components on a Wall

This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU on a wall.

This section describes the procedure for installing the BBU on a wall when a DBS3900 is
installed indoors.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If the BBU mounting ears are installed reversely, skip this step. If the BBU mounting
ears are installed in standard mode, perform the following operations:
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the BBU.
2.
Install the mounting ears reversely and tighten the four M4 screws on each of the mounting
ears, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 18-4 Installing mounting ears reversely
Step 2 Tighten the four M612 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), and secure the mounting ears on the wall
to the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1333
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-5 Securing the mounting ears on the wall to the mounting ears on the BBU
Step 3 Place the BBU against the wall, and mark the positions of bolt holes in the mounting ears on the
wall, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18-6 Marking the positions of bolt holes in the mounting ears on the wall
(1) Level
(2) BBU
(3) Wall
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1334
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) M6x60 bolt
1.
(2) Nut
(3) Spring washer
(4) Flat washer
(5) Expansion tube
Use a hammer drill with a 8 drill bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points.
Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 50 mm (2.17 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
CAUTION
2.
3.
4.
hole.
5.
Remove the M6x60 bolt, nut, spring washer, and flat washer from each expansion bolt
assembly in sequence.
NOTICE
After dismantling an expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is
on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the BBU cannot be installed on the wall evenly
and securely.
Step 5 Place the BBU with its rear panel upward and front panel downward. Use a torque wrench to
tighten the four M660 bolts of the mounting ears on the wall to 5 Nm (44.25 lbfin.) and secure
the BBU onto the wall, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1335
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End
18.3.2 Installing the DCDU

The DCDU can be installed on the wall in an indoor DBS3900.
Context
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can supply power to a BBU installed on an indoor
wall.
NOTE
The following describes the procedure for installing a DCDU-03B. The procedures for installing a DCDU-03B,
a DCDU-11B, and a DCDU-12B are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Use four M6x12 screws to secure the mounting ears on the wall and those on the DCDU, and
tighten the screws to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1336
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-9 Securing the mounting ears on the wall and those on the DCDU
Step 2 Place the DCDU against the wall, and use a marker to mark the holes for installing screws
securing mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18-10 Marking the positions for installing screws securing mounting ears of the DCDU
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1337
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) M6x60 bolts
1.
(2) Nut
(3) Spring washer
(4) Flat washer
(5) Expansion tube
Use a hammer drill with a 8 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points. Ensure
that the depth of each hole ranges from 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
CAUTION
2.
3.
4.
Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion bolt assembly until it goes into the hole
completely. The expansion bolt must protrude 20 mm (0.79 in.) from the wall.
5.
Remove the M6x60 bolt, nut, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.
NOTICE
After dismantling an expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is
level with the wall. Otherwise, the DCDU cannot be installed on the wall evenly and
securely.
Step 4 Tightly press the DCDU against the wall with the front panel facing the right and the power port
facing downwards. Then use a torque wrench to tighten the four M6x60 screws on the wallmounting ears for the DCDU to 5 Nm (44.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1338
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-12 Installing the DCDU
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1339
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1340
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1341
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1342
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1343
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1344
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1345
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.

When a distributed base station is deployed in an indoor wall-mounted scenario, a PGND cable
for the BBU and a PGND cable for the DCDU must be installed onsite.
Installing a PGND Cable for the BBU

A PGND cable for the BBU ensures proper grounding of the BBU.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable for the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1346
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 18-1 Specifications of a PGND cable for the BBU

Cable
CrossSectional
Area
One End
The Other
End
Color
PGND cable for

the BBU
6 mm2 (0.009 in.

2)
OT terminal
(M4)
OT terminal
(M8)
Green and
yellow
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the BBU.
1.
Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
Step 2 Install a PGND cable for the BBU.

Connect the M4 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable for the BBU to the ground terminal
on the BBU and the M8 OT terminal at the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 18-21 Installing a PGND cable for the BBU
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1347
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Labeling Power Cables.
----End
Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU

A PGND cable for the DCDU ensures proper grounding of the DCDU. The DCDU are classified
into DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.
Context
l
The specifications of PGND cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B are
the same, as shown in the following table.
Table 18-2 Specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU
Cable
CrossSectional
Area
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
PGND cable
for the DCDU
16 mm2 (0.025
in.2)
OT terminal
(M6)
OT terminal
(M6)
Green and
yellow
The procedures for installing a PGND cable for DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B
are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the DCDU.
1.
2.
Step 2 Connect one end of the PGND cable for the DCDU to the ground terminal on the DCDU and
the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1348
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-23 Installing a PGND cable for the DCDU
----End

Installing DCDU Power Cables

DCDUs supported by a wall-mounted and a 19-inch rack DBS3900 include the DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. The DCDU power cables feed -48 V power input into the
DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.
Context
Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables are shown in the
following table.
Table 18-3 Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables
Cable
DCDU-03B
power cable
DCDU-11B
power cable
DCDU-12B
power cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2

or 0.025 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue

[0.054 in.2], one group; or
16 mm2 [0.025 in.2]), two
groups

1349
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If the cables are purchased
l The following description shows an example of installing the DCDU-11B power cables. The procedure
for installing the DCDU-03B power cables and DCDU-12B power cables are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare DCDU power cables
1.
Cut the power cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to the end of the cables connected to the power equipment according to
the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
1.
Connect the OT terminals to one end of the power cables to the wiring terminals marked
NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the external power
equipment.
Figure 18-24 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed on a
wall)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1350
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 18-25 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed in a
19-inch rack)
bind them.
----End

Context
Table 18-4 Specifications of a BBU power cable (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU
-03B
BBU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
Color
One End
The Other End
Black
0.009 in.2)
3V3 connectors

1351
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU
-11B
DCDU
-12B
Color
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
One End
The Other End
Tool-less female connector

(pressfit type)
EPC4 connector
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

Power Cable.
DCDU-11B

Cable(1).
DCDU-12B
See Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the

Power Cable.
Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the DCDU. The following
table lists the BBU power cable connections to different DCDUs. Figure 18-26 uses the
DCDU-03B as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1352
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B
Connect the OT terminals to the LOAD6

terminal on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the
screws on the connector to 1.2 Nm (10.61
lbfin.).
DCDU-11B

type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6
port on the DCDU-11B.
DCDU-12B
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the

power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
DCDU-12B.
CAUTION
NOTE
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1353
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
DCDU11B
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending on
the port on the
RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
RTN
(+)
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complying
with the
European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
0.006 in.2)

(pressfit type)
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1354
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Equip
ment
DCDU12B
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
One End
The Other
End
EPC5 connector
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

DCDU-11B

Cable(2).
DCDU-12B

Cable(2).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1355
DBS3900
Installation Guide
CAUTION
Step 3 Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the DCDU side through the feeder window.
Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND
cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is
as follows:
1.
shield layer.
2.
use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim off surplus part from the heads of the cable
ties without leaving any sharp edge.
(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2) (2) Hole for a cable tie ( 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1356
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
clip.
(1) Waterproof tape
(2) Insulation tape
(3) Cable tie
(4) Power cable
(5) PGND cable
NOTICE
Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.)
away from the head of the cable tie.
Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as shown in Figure
18-30 and Figure 18-31. The following table lists the installation positions of the RRU power
cable on the power equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0
to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-03B. Then tighten
the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
DCDU-11B

LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11B.
DCDU-12B

power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5
ports on the DCDU-12B.

1357
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
The following figures show how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-11B
and is installed on a wall or in a 19-inch rack. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the
RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Figure 18-30 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power to RRUs
and is installed on a wall)
(1) Group Clip
(2) Feeder Window
(3) Ground Bar
and is installed in a Indoor Centralized Support)
(1) Group Clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Feeder Window

(3) Ground Bar
1358
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End


Prerequisites
NOTICE
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector of the E1/T1 cable to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU/WMPT/
UTRP/UMPT, as shown in the following figure.
bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1359
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured as an example. For cable
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the WMPT/GTMU/UMPT/
UTRP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1360
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
l The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes
may become abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical
module within 20 minutes.
l The fiber optical cables in an IMB03 need be routed and bound along the right side of the
IMB for easy maintenance of the fan in the future.
l When an IMB03 is installed on a wall, the fiber optical cable out of the IMB03 should be
routed with the bending radius of equal to or greater than 140 mm (5.51 in.).
NOTE
l The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the cable connections
in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
simultaneously.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1361
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the right side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties
to bind them.
bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1362
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(2) Wavelength
(1) Maximum rate
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1363
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1364
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
----End
18.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal

Cable
An EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a
BBU.
Context
A BBU provides a maximum of four ports for Boolean signal inputs and a maximum of four
ports for RS485 signal inputs. When these eight ports are insufficient, a EMUA/EMUB is
required.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1365
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The figures in this section use the EMUA as examples.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown in Figure 18-41.
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal cable to the MON0/
MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
2.
Connect the DB9 male connector at the other end of the cable to the EMUA.
Figure 18-41 Installing the EMUA monitoring signal cable
bind it.
----End

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1366
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1367
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1368
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
respectively.
ties to bind them.
----End
18.4.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable

A GPS clock signal cable transmits GPS clock signals received from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Context
Procedure
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1369
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1370
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Step 4 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6, as shown
NOTE
If the LMPT or UMPTa6 is configured in the BBU, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1371
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


No.
Item
design.
17.8 Repainting.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1372
DBS3900
Installation Guide

No.
Item

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1373
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
13

No.
Item
the same direction.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1374
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the DCDU are correctly connected.
The power supply to the DCDU meets the requirements of the power system.
External power supply to the DCDU has been shut off.
All circuit breakers on the DCDU have been set to OFF.
Context
NOTICE
Table 18-11 Circuit breakers on DCDUs

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B

equipment.)
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1375
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the DCDU.
Step 3 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU to ON. Skip
this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B.
each component.
DANGER

Component
BBU

l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The indicators indicating the status
of the CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
RRU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on
for 1s and off for 1s).
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1376
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1377
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Example
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1378
19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19Inch Rack
DBS3900
Installation Guide
19

Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the process for installing components and related cables when the BBU
is installed in an indoor 19-inch rack.
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in an indoor 19-inch
cabinet with DC power supply.
In a 19-inch rack scenario, the installation process includes installing components and installing
cables.
19.3 Installing Components
This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU in the 19-inch
rack when the DBS3900 is installed indoors.
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1379
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in an indoor 19-inch
cabinet with DC power supply.
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in a 19-inch cabinet.
Figure 19-1 Clearance requirements for installing a BBU in a 19-inch cabinet
NOTE
l Retain 25 mm (0.98 in.) on the left of the BBU for ventilation.

l Retain 25 mm (0.98 in.) on the right of the BBU for ventilation.
l Retain 70 mm (2.76 in.) in front of the BBU panel for cable layout and 800 mm (31.50 in.) for
maintenance.

In a 19-inch rack scenario, the installation process includes installing components and installing
cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1380
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU in the 19-inch
rack when the DBS3900 is installed indoors.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1381
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
l
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1382
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
or IMB03.

1383
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1384
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1385
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1386
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
----End
19.3.2 Installing a DCDU

A DCDU can be installed in the 19-inch rack in an indoor DBS3900.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1387
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
When a DCDU supplies power to the BBU and a WGRU is optionally configured, the
DCDU is installed in the 1 U space above the WGRU, and the WGRU is installed in the 1
U space above the BBU.
The section describes the procedure for installing a DCDU-03B (shortened to DCDU). The
procedures for installing a DCDU-11B and a DCDU-12B are the same.
NOTE
l When a DCDU is installed in an indoor centralized rack, the mounting ears on the DCDU must be installed
on the edges of the DCDU.
l When a DCDU is installed in an INS12, move each mounting ear on the DCDU backwards by one hole.
l The following figures use a DCDU installed in an indoor centralized rack to show how to install the DCDU.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the DCDU. Only when a DCDU is installed on an INS12,
move each mounting ear on the DCDU backwards by one hole, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the DCDU.
2.
Move each mounting ear backwards by one hole and tighten the four removed M4 screws
on the mounting ear to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 19-14 Moving the mounting ears on the DCDU
Step 2 Slide the DCDU-03B into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten four M6x16 panel
screws to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1388
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End
19.3.3 (Optional) Installing a WGRU

A WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) is optionally installed in the UMTS base stations only.
It provides the positioning function for the base station.
Context
l
When a WGRU is installed in an indoor centralized rack, the mounting ears on the WGRU
must be installed on the edges of the DCDU.
When a WGRU is installed in an INS12, move each mounting ear on the WGRU backwards
by one hole.
The following figures use a WGRU installed in an indoor centralized rack to show how to
install the WGRU.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the WGRU. Only when a WGRU is installed on an INS12,
move each mounting ear on the WGRU backwards by one hole, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the WGRU.
2.
on the mounting ear to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1389
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 19-16 Moving the mounting ears on the WGRU
Step 2 Slide the WGRU into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten four M6x16 panel screws
Figure 19-17 Installing a WGRU
(1) Front panel of the WGRU
(2) Rear panel of the WGRU
NOTE
l Reserve a minimum of 25 mm (0.98 in.) space on both the left and right sides of the WGRU for ventilation.
l Reserve a minimum of 70 mm (2.76 in.) space in front of the WGRU for cable layout and 800 mm (31.49
in.) space at the rear of the WGRU for maintenance.
Step 3 Install a PGND cable for the WGRU.

1.
2.
Add OT terminals at each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
3.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable for the WGRU to the ground bolt
on the rear panel of the WGRU and the OT terminal at the other end to the external ground
bar, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1390
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 19-18 Installing a PGND cable for the WGRU
NOTE
Choose the shortest cabling route to ground the PGND cable for the WGRU.
4.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable
ties to bind them.
Step 4 Install a GPS clock signal cable.

1.
Connect the Type N female connector at one end of the GPS clock signal cable to the ATN
port on the rear panel of the WGRU and the SMA male connector at the other end to the
GPS antenna, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19-19 Installing a GPS clock signal cable
2.
Route the GPS clock signal cable upwards along the column of the rack, and use a cable
tie to bind the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements.
Step 5 Install a WGRU power cable.

NOTE
One end of the WGRU power cable is a two-hole male connector. The other end is an OT terminal which needs
to be prepared onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1391
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
2.
Add OT terminal to the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal
and the Power Cable.
3.
Connect the two-hole male connector at one end of the WGRU power cable to the POWER
port on the rear panel of the WGRU and the OT terminal at the other end to the LOAD7 or
LOAD8 port on the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19-20 Installing a WGRU power cable
4.
Route the power cable to the rear panel of the WGRU along the right side of the output
port on the DCDU, and ensure that the cable cannot obstruct front panels of the DCDU and
WGRU. Use a cable tie to bind the cable according to the instructions in Cabling
Requirements.
Step 6 Install a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
The GPS signal cable transmits GPS signals received from the COM1 port. The PPS signal cable transmits PPS
signals received from the PPS1 port.
RJ-45 connectors have been installed at both ends of the PPS signal cable and GPS signal cable before delivery.
Cut off the RJ-45 connectors at one end of the cables to be installed and use the bare wires.
1.
Connect the RJ-45 connector at one end of the PPS signal cable to the PPS1 port on the
front panel of the WGRU and the bare wires at the other end to the RGPS ports on the
USCU in the BBU. Table 19-1 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the PPS signal
cable.
2.
Connect the RJ-45 connector at one end of the GPS signal cable to the COM1 port on the
front panel of the WGRU and the bare wires at the other end to the RGPS ports on the
USCU in the BBU. Table 19-1 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the GPS signal
cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1392
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 19-21 Installing a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable
Table 19-1 Pin assignment for the wires of a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Port
Pin
Assignment
Port
Silkscreen
Wire Color
WGRU-PPS1
Pin 1CLK1_PPS_T
XD+
USCU-RGPS
1S+
White and
orange
WGRU-PPS1
Pin 2CLK1_PPS_T
XD-
USCU-RGPS
1S-
Orange
WGRUCOM1
Pin 1COM1_COM
RXD+
USCU-RGPS
TX+
White and
orange
WGRUCOM1
Pin 2COM1_COM
RXD-
USCU-RGPS
TX-
Orange
WGRUCOM1
Pin 3COM1_COM_
TXD+
USCU-RGPS
RX+
White and
green
WGRUCOM1
Pin 6COM1_COM_
TXD-
USCU-RGPS
RX-
Green
ties to bind them.

1393
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1394
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1395
DBS3900
Installation Guide

(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1396
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1397
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1398
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1399
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
19.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU

A PGND cable for the DCDU ensures proper grounding of the DCDU. The DCDU are classified
into DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.
Context
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The following figure shows specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B which is installed on an indoor centralized rack.

1400
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 19-2 Specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU

Cable
CrossSectional
Area
One End
The Other
End
Color
PGND cable
for the DCDU
6 mm2 (0.009
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4)
OT terminal
(M4)
Green and
yellow
When the DCDU-12B is installed on an INS12, the DCDU-12B is grounded through the
mounting ears, and therefore the PGND cable for the DCDU-12B is not required. The
specifications of PGND cables for the DCDU-03B and DCDU-11B are the same, as listed
in Table 19-2.
When a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B is installed on an indoor centralized rack

or INS12, the PGND cable for the DCDU is required. This section describe the procedure
for installing the PGND cable for the DCDU-03B. The procedure for installing the PGND
cable for the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the DCDU.
1.
2.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the DCDU.

Connect one end of the PGND cable for the DCDU to the ground terminal on the DCDU and
the other end to the ground screw on the 19-inch rack, as shown in the following figure.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1401
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Installing DCDU Power Cables

DCDUs supported by a wall-mounted and a 19-inch rack DBS3900 include the DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. The DCDU power cables feed -48 V power input into the
DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.
Context
Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables are shown in the
following table.
Table 19-3 Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables
Cable
DCDU-03B
power cable
DCDU-11B
power cable
DCDU-12B
power cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue

or 0.025 in.2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue

[0.054 in.2], one group; or
16 mm2 [0.025 in.2]), two
groups
NOTE
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If the cables are purchased
l The following description shows an example of installing the DCDU-11B power cables. The procedure
for installing the DCDU-03B power cables and DCDU-12B power cables are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare DCDU power cables
1.
Cut the power cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to the end of the cables connected to the power equipment according to
the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
1.
Connect the OT terminals to one end of the power cables to the wiring terminals marked
NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the external power
equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1402
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 19-31 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed on a
wall)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1403
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 19-32 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed in a
19-inch rack)
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
Table 19-4 Specifications of a BBU power cable (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU
-03B
BBU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
Color
One End
The Other End
Black
0.009 in.2)
3V3 connectors

1404
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU
-11B
DCDU
-12B
Color
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
One End
The Other End

(pressfit type)
EPC4 connector
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

Power Cable.
DCDU-11B

Cable(1).
DCDU-12B
See Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the

Power Cable.
Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the DCDU. The following
table lists the BBU power cable connections to different DCDUs. Figure 19-33 uses the
DCDU-03B as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1405
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B
Connect the OT terminals to the LOAD6

terminal on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the
screws on the connector to 1.2 Nm (10.61
lbfin.).
DCDU-11B

type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6
port on the DCDU-11B.
DCDU-12B

power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
DCDU-12B.
CAUTION
NOTE
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1406
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Context
Power
Equip
ment
Cable
DCDU03B
RRU
power
cable
DCDU11B
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
0.005 in.2(12AWG))
Depending on
the port on the
RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
RTN
(+)
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(complying
with the
European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
0.006 in.2)

(pressfit type)
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1407
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Power
Equip
ment
DCDU12B
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black
(complying
with the
North
American
standard)
One End
The Other
End
EPC5 connector
Brown
(complying
with the
European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

DCDU-11B

Cable(2).
DCDU-12B

Cable(2).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1408
DBS3900
Installation Guide
CAUTION
Step 3 Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the DCDU side through the feeder window.
Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND
cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is
as follows:
1.
shield layer.
2.
use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim off surplus part from the heads of the cable
ties without leaving any sharp edge.
(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2) (2) Hole for a cable tie ( 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1409
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
clip.
(1) Waterproof tape
(2) Insulation tape
(3) Cable tie
(4) Power cable
(5) PGND cable
NOTICE
Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.)
away from the head of the cable tie.
Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as shown in Figure
19-37 and Figure 19-38. The following table lists the installation positions of the RRU power
cable on the power equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Power Equipment
DCDU-03B

NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0
to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-03B. Then tighten
the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
DCDU-11B

LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11B.
DCDU-12B

power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5
ports on the DCDU-12B.

1410
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
The following figures show how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-11B
and is installed on a wall or in a 19-inch rack. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the
RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
and is installed on a wall)
(1) Group Clip
(2) Feeder Window
(3) Ground Bar
and is installed in a Indoor Centralized Support)
(1) Group Clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Feeder Window

(3) Ground Bar
1411
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


Prerequisites
NOTICE
Procedure
UTRP/UMPT, as shown in the following figure.
ties to bind them.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1412
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
l
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the WMPT/GTMU/UMPT/
UTRP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure.
ties to bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1413
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
NOTE
Station Cables.
simultaneously.
simultaneously.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1414
DBS3900
Installation Guide
to bind them.
ties to bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1415
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
(2) Wavelength
(1) Maximum rate
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1416
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1417
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
NOTE
----End
19.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal

Cable
An EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a
BBU.
Context
A BBU provides a maximum of four ports for Boolean signal inputs and a maximum of four
ports for RS485 signal inputs. When these eight ports are insufficient, a EMUA/EMUB is
required.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1418
DBS3900
Installation Guide
The figures in this section use the EMUA as examples.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown in Figure 19-48.
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal cable to the MON0/
MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
2.
Connect the DB9 male connector at the other end of the cable to the EMUA.
Figure 19-48 Installing the EMUA monitoring signal cable
ties to bind it.
----End

Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1419
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1420
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1421
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
respectively.
ties to bind them.
----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
design.
1422
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
17.8 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
1423
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.

1424
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the DCDU are correctly connected.
The power supply to the DCDU meets the requirements of the power system.
External power supply to the DCDU has been shut off.
All circuit breakers on the DCDU have been set to OFF.
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1425
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 19-11 Circuit breakers on DCDUs

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-12B

equipment.)
NOTE
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the DCDU.
Step 3 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU to ON. Skip
this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B.
each component.
DANGER

Component
BBU

l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The indicators indicating the status
of the CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1426
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Component
RRU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on
for 1s and off for 1s).
NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1427
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
Example
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1428
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1429
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20
Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in an IMB03
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the process for installing an IMB03, components in the IMB03, and
related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an
IMB03.
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing IMB03.
This section describes the process for installing an independent IMB03.
20.3 Installing the IMB03
This section describes the procedures and the precautions for installing the IMB03 on a wall and
on an IFS06.
20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03
If a DBS3900 is installed indoors, IMB03 cabinets can be optionally configured, and BBUs and
power equipment can be installed in the IMB03 cabinets.
onsite.
20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist
After the subrack is installed, you need to check whether the hardware is properly installed.
20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack
This section describes procedures for installing the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1430
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the clearance requirements for installing IMB03.
20.1.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB03

This section describes the recommended and minimum installation clearances for a wallmounted IMB03.
Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Right Side Mounted on a Wall
The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its right side mounted
on a wall.
Figure 20-1 Installation clearances for an IMB03 with its right side mounted on a wall
(a) Recommended installation clearances
(b) Minimum installation clearances
Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Left Side Mounted on a Wall
The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its left side mounted
on a wall.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1431
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-2 Installation clearances for an IMB03 with its left side mounted on a wall
Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on a Wall

The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its back mounted on
a wall.
Figure 20-3 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with its back mounted on a wall
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1432
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20.1.2 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 Mounted on an IFS06

This section describes the recommended and minimum installation clearances for an IMB03
mounted on an IFS06.
Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Right Side Mounted on an IFS06
The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its right side mounted
on an IFS06.
Figure 20-4 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its right side mounted on an IFS06
Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Left Side Mounted on an IFS06
The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its left side mounted
on an IFS06.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1433
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-5 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its left side mounted on an IFS06
Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on an IFS06
The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its back mounted on
an IFS06.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1434
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-6 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its back mounted on an IFS06

This section describes the process for installing an independent IMB03.
The installation process is shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1435
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-7 IMB03 installation process
NOTE
This section describes the process for installing an IMB03 on a wall or on an IFS06, and RRUs are installed
remotely. For how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides.
20.3 Installing the IMB03

This section describes the procedures and the precautions for installing the IMB03 on a wall and
on an IFS06.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1436
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20.3.1 Installing an IMB03 on a Wall

An IMB03 can be installed with its back or one side against a wall.
Installing an IMB03 on a Wall with One of Its Sides Against a Wall

This section describes procedures for installing the IMB03 with one of its sides against a wall.
Context
When the IMB03 is installed with one of its sides against the wall, the recommended diameter
for the holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.), the space between the holes in the two
upper mounting ears is 292 mm (11.5 in.), and the space between the holes in the upper and
lower mounting ears on one side is 611 mm (24.06 in.).
Figure 20-8 Space between the holes in two mounting ears
NOTE
This section describes how to install the IMB03 with its right side against a wall. The procedures are the
same for installing the IMB03 with its left side against a wall.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the GPS surge protector
NOTE
The IMB03 supports two GPS surge protectors that are optional, as shown in the following figure. If a GPS
surge protector needs to be installed on the IMB03, install the GPS surge protector on the IMB03 before
you install the IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1437
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-9 GPS surge protector
(1) GPS surge protector A
(2) GPS surge protector B
NOTE
GPS surge protector A does not require a PGND cable.
1.
Install the attachment plate for the GPS surge protector at the bottom of the IMB03, as
Figure 20-10 Installing the attachment plate for the GPS surge protector
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Secure the GPS surge protector to the attachment plate. Tighten the attachment plate
manually in advance, and then use a wrench to secure it, as shown in the following figure.

1438
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
Install the GPS clock signal cable on the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following
figure.
Step 2 Install the IMB03 mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1439
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Insulation washers
(2) Installation positions for screws
is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark the anchor points, as shown in the following
figure.
The distance between the marking-off template and the ground ranges from 1000 mm (39.37
in.) to 1200 mm (47.24 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1440
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Drilling positions
NOTICE
When installing the IMB03 on a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25 lbf) outward
force vertical to it.
Step 4 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion anchor bolts in the holes, as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1441
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-15 Drilling holes at the anchor points and installing the expansion anchor bolts
(1) M10x80 bolt
1.
(2) Nut
(3) Spring washer
(4) Flat washer
(5) Expansion tube
Use a hammer drill with a 12 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points.
Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 55 mm (2.17 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).
NOTICE
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner to clear dust inside and around the holes, and then measure the interhole spacing. If the spacing is too wide or too narrow, drill holes again.
3.
Partially tighten each expansion anchor bolt and place it vertically into the hole.
4.
Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion anchor bolt until it goes all the way into the
hole.
5.
Tighten and then loosen the expansion anchor bolt, and remove the M10 bolt, spring washer,
and flat washer in sequence at the behind.
NOTICE
After dismantling the expansion anchor bolt, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is
on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the device cannot be installed on the wall evenly
and securely.
Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper nuts, as
NOTE
After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the
horizontal plane.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1442
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-16 Partially tightening the upper nuts
(1) IMB03 mounting ears
Step 6 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB03 subrack with the installation holes, and
use a torque wrench to tighten the nuts, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20-17 Tightening the lower nuts
(1) Nut
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1443
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installing an IMB03 with Its back Against a Wall

This section describes procedures for installing the IMB03 with its back against a wall.
Prerequisites
When installing the IMB03 on a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25 lbf) outward
force vertical to it.
Context
When the IMB03 is installed with its back against the wall, the recommended diameter for the
holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.), the space between the holes in the two upper
mounting ears is 128 mm (5.04 in.), and the space between the holes in the upper and lower
mounting ears on one side is 611 mm (24.06 in.).
Figure 20-18 Space between the holes in two mounting ears
NOTE
This section describes how to install the IMB03 with its right side against a wall. The procedures are the
same for installing the IMB03 with its left side against a wall.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the GPS surge protector. For detailed operations, see Installing an IMB03 on a Wall
with One of Its Sides Against a Wall.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1444
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Use a level to measure whether the two holes are at the same horizontal line, place a markingoff template against the wall, and then use a marker to mark anchor points, as shown in the
following figure.
The distance between the marking-off template and the ground ranges from 1000 mm (39.37
in.) to 1200 mm (47.24 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1445
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Level
(2) Drilling positions
Step 4 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes. For detailed operations,
see Installing an IMB03 on a Wall with One of Its Sides Against a Wall.
Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper nuts, as
NOTE
After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the
horizontal plane.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1446
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-21 Partially tightening the upper nuts
use a torque wrench to tighten the nuts, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1447
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-22 Tightening the lower nuts
(1) Nut
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
----End
20.3.2 Installing an IMB03 on an IFS06

This section describes the procedures for installing an IMB03 on an IFS06. One or two IMB03s
can be installed on the IFS06. When two IMB03s need to be installed on the IFS06, you are
advised to install the lower IMB03 first. The procedures for installing the upper and lower
IMB03s are the same. This section uses the upper IMB03 as an example to describe the
procedures for installing an IMB03 on the IFS06.
Installing an IMB03 on the IFS06 with One of Its Sides Mounted on the IFS06
This section describes procedures for installing an IMB03 on the IFS06 with one of its sides
mounted on the IFS06. An IMB03 can be installed with either its left or right side mounted on
an IFS06. This section describes the procedures for installing an IMB03 with its right side
mounted on the IFS06. The procedures are the same for installing an IMB03 with its left side
mounted on the IFS06.
Context
One or two IMB03s can be installed on the IFS06. Figure 20-23 shows the installation positions
for the IMB03s. When installing the lower IMB03, move the lower adjustable beam to the middle
installation hole. When installing the upper IMB03, move the upper adjustable beam to the
middle installation hole, and for detailed operations, see Figure 20-25.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1448
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-23 Installation position for an IMB03 with one of its sides mounted on the IFS06
(1) Upper IMB03

mounting holes
(2) Lower IMB03

mounting holes
(3) Upper adjustable beam (4) Lower adjustable beam
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1449
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Move the upper adjustable beam of the IFS06 to the middle installation hole, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 20-25 Moving the adjustable beams
(1) Default installation positions for the adjustable

beams
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Positions where the adjustable beams need to be

moved for installing the IMB03s

1450
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Screw two M10x30 bolts into the two upper mounting holes of the stand, and reserve the length
of 20 mm (0.79 in.) to 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20-26 Installing the bolts
Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the upper bolts, and use a torque wrench to secure the bolts, as
NOTE
Partially tighten the two upper bolts, and then secure them after tightening the two lower bolts to ensure
that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1451
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-27 Partially tightening the upper bolts
use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20-28 Tightening the lower bolts
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1452
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Installing an IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on the IFS06

This section describes procedures for installing an IMB03 with its back mounted on the IFS06.
Context
One or two IMB03s can be installed on the IFS06. Figure 20-29 shows the installation positions
for the IMB03s. When installing the lower IMB03, move the lower adjustable beam to the middle
installation hole. When installing the upper IMB03, move the upper adjustable beam to the
middle installation hole, and for detailed operations, see Figure 20-31.
Figure 20-29 Installation position for an IMB03 with its back mounted on the IFS06
(1) Upper IMB03

mounting holes
(2) Lower IMB03

mounting holes
(3) Upper adjustable beam (4) Lower adjustable beam
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1453
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Move the upper adjustable beam of the IFS06 to the middle installation hole, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 20-31 Moving the adjustable beams
(1) Default installation positions for the adjustable

beams
(2) Positions where the adjustable beams needs to be

moved for installing the IMB03s
Step 4 Screw two M10x30 bolts into the two upper mounting holes of the stand, and reserve the length
of 20 mm (0.79 in.) to 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1454
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-32 Installing the bolts
Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the upper bolts, and use a torque wrench to secure the bolts, as
NOTE
Partially tighten the two upper bolts, and then secure them after tightening the two lower bolts to ensure
that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1455
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-33 Partially tightening the upper bolts
use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20-34 Tightening the lower bolts
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1456
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03

If a DBS3900 is installed indoors, IMB03 cabinets can be optionally configured, and BBUs and
power equipment can be installed in the IMB03 cabinets.

Context
l
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1457
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
or IMB03.

1458
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1459
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1460
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1461
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1462
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20.4.2 Installing the Power Equipment

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is installed in the IMB03 in DC scenarios, and
the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1 is installed in the IMB03 in AC scenarios.
Context
l
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, DCDU-12B, EPS30-4815AF, or ETP48100-B1 is installed

in the 1 U space in the IMB03.
The following describes the procedure for installing a DCDU. The procedures for installing
a DCDU-03B, a DCDU-11B, a DCDU-12B, a EPS30-4815AF, and a ETP48100-B1 in the
IMB03 are the same.
NOTICE
The IMB03 that is equipped with an ETP48100-B1 must be installed in an equipment room that
only maintenance personnel can enter.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the DCDU-03B if the DCDU-03B is installed in the
IMB03, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU.
2.
on the mounting ears to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 20-46 Moving the mounting ears on the DCDU
Step 2 Slide the DCDU slowly into the corresponding slots along the guide rails according to the slot
assignment drawings.
NOTE
The external power input port should be kept in the lower part of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, DCDU-12B,
EPS30-4815AF, or ETP48100-B1.
Step 3 Use a screwdriver to tighten the four M6x16 screws, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1463
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-47 Installing the DCDU
(1) External power input port
(2) DCDU
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1464
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1465
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1466
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1467
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1468
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1469
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1470
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
20.5.2 Cable Installation Process

This section describes the process of installing IMB03 cables.
Process of Installing IMB03 Cables

Figure 20-56 shows the cable installation process.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1471
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-56 Process of installing IMB03 cables
20.5.3 Removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03

This section describes procedures for removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1472
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-57 Removing the protective plates
NOTE
After all cables are installed, if there is still spare space in the cable holes, cut the protective plates to an
appropriate shape to seal the cable holes.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing PGND cables for the IMB03
and modules in this cabinet.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cables for the IMB03 and modules in
the IMB03.
Table 20-1 Specifications of the PGND cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
PGND cable for the

IMB03
OT terminal (M6, 16
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)
Add corresponding
OT terminals to the
PGND cable onsite.
Green and yellow
PGND cable for the

DCDU
OT terminal (M4, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M4, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Green and yellow
PGND cable for the

ETP48100-B1
OT terminal (M4, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M4, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Green and yellow
PGND cable for the

GPS surge protector
OT terminal (M8, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
OT terminal (M4, 6
mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Green and yellow

1473
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
When routing the PGND cable at the bottom of the IMB03, avoid obstructing the heat dissipation
holes of the IMB03.
Procedure
1.
2.
Step 2 Install a PGND cable for the IMB03, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws inside
the IMB03.
2.
Connect the other end of the PGND cable to an external ground bar.
Figure 20-58 Installing the PGND cable for the IMB03
Step 3 Install a PGND cable for the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws on the
DCDU.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws
inside the IMB03.
NOTE
The PGND cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B are installed in the same way. This
section uses the DCDU-03B as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1474
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 4 Install a PGND cable for the ETP48100-B1, as shown in the following figure.
1.
ETP48100-B1.
2.
inside the IMB03.
Figure 20-60 Installing a PGND cable for the ETP48100-B1
Step 5 Install the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following figure.
1.
GPS surge protector.
2.
inside the IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1475
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-61 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector
bind them.
----End

Installing Input Power Cables for the IMB03

The IMB03 input power cables connect to the power devices in the IMB03 and the external
power devices, feeding power to components in the IMB03.
Context
The input power cables for the IMB03 are classified into the DCDU power cable, EPS30-4815AF
power cable, and ETP48100-B1 power cable according to different power equipment. The
following tables lists the specifications of the power cables.
Table 20-2 Specifications of the input power cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
DCDU power cables

0.025 in.2)
Depending on the external

equipment
EPS30-4815AF power
cable
C13 connector

1476
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
One End
ETP48100-B1 power
cable
OT terminal (M4, 4 mm2 or 0.006

in.2)
The Other End
NOTE
NOTICE
When routing the input power cables for the IMB03 on the bottom of the IMB03, avoid
obstructing the heat dissipation holes of the IMB03.
Procedure
l
Install the DCDU power cables.

1.
2.
Add OT terminals at one end of the cables according to the specifications in Table
20-2 and the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
3.
Route the power cables into the cabinet.
4.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cables to the DC input terminals NEG(-)
and RTN(+) on the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1477
DBS3900
Installation Guide
5.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
6.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.
7.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying

Label.
Install power cables for the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1.

1.
2.
Strip 45 mm (1.77 in.) of jacket off the end of the power cable, as shown in the
following figure.
3.
Optional: When an ETP48100-B1 is used, add OT terminals to one end of the power
cable according to Table 20-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the
Power Cable. When an EPS30-4815AF is used, skip this step.
4.
Route the power cables into the cabinet.
5.
Connect the power cables to the ports on the corresponding power equipment.
When an EPS30-4815AF is used, connect the end of the power cable with a C13
connector to the AC INPUT port on the external AC input terminal on the
EPS30-4815AF, as shown in Figure 20-64.
When an ETP48100-B1 is used, do as follows: Cut a big hole in the rat-resistant
net at the bottom of the IMB03, as shown in Figure 20-65. Route the power cable
through the big hole in the rat-resistant net. Connect the brown and blue wires to
the L/L1 and N/L2 wiring terminals on the input side of the ETP48100-B1, and
the green and yellow wire to the ground point on the IMB03, as shown in Figure
20-66.
Figure 20-64 Installing the EPS30-4815AF power cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1478
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-65 Cutting a big hole in the rat-resistant net
Figure 20-66 Installing the ETP48100-B1 power cable
6.
Connect the other end of the power cable to the external power equipment.
7.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.
8.

Label.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1479
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the procedure for installing the BBU power cables in an IMB in AC and
DC scenarios.
Context
Cable
Power
Equipment
One End
The Other End
Color
BBU power cable (in

an AC-powered IMB)
EPS30-4815
AF
3V3
connector
H4 connector
ETP48100B1
3V3
connector
EPC5 connector
DCDU-03B
3V3
connector
OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2

or 0.002 in.2)
Black
BBU power
cable (in a
DC-powered
IMB)
RTN
(+)
NEG
(-)
Blue
DCDU-11B
DCDU-12B
3V3
connector

(pressfit type)
EPC4 connector
NOTE
Procedure
l
Install the BBU power cable in an AC-powered IMB, as shown in Figure 20-67 and Figure
20-68.
1.
Optional: Add a connector to the BBU power cable when the ETP48100-B1 supplies
power to the BBU, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.
2.
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the BBU power cable to the corresponding port on the power
equipment.
When an EPS30-4815AF supplies power, the H4 connector at the other end of the
BBU power cable is connected to the LOAD1 port on the EPS30-4815AF.
When an ETP48100-B1 supplies power, the EPC5 connector at the other end of
the BBU power cable is connected to the LOAD3 port on the ETP48100-B1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1480
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-67 Installing a BBU power cable (when the EPS30-4815AF supplies
power)
Figure 20-68 Installing a BBU power cable (when the ETP48100-B1 supplies power)
4.
5.

Label.
Install the BBU power cable in a DC-powered IMB, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment.

1481
DBS3900
Installation Guide
If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector
(Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(2).
If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the
Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. OT
terminals must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2.
lbfin.).
CAUTION
Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be
connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the
reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.
3.
Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment.

When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire
and black wire at the other end of the BBU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN
(+) terminals, respectively, near the LOAD6 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B. Then
tighten the screws on the connector to 1.2 Nm (10.61 lbfin.).
When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
DCDU-11B.
When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC4 connector at the other
end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12B.
NOTE
equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connector at one end of the second BBU
power cable is connected to the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector, tool-less
female connector (pressfit type), or OT terminal at the other end is connected to the LOAD7
port or LOAD7 terminal on the DCDU.
NOTE
The following figure shows how to install a BBU power cable when the BBU is powered by a
DCDU-03B. The BBU power cable is installed in the same way when the BBU is powered by a
DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1482
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-69 Installing a BBU power cable (in a DC-powered IMB)
4.
5.

Label.
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU power cables in the IMB in AC and
DC scenarios.
Context
The specifications of an RRU power cable are the same when the EPS30-4815AF or the
DCDU-03B supplies power to the RRUs, as shown in the following table.
Table 20-4 Specifications of an RRU power cable (1)
Cable
RRU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
One End
The Other End
Color
Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals

(M4, 3.3 mm2 or 0.005 in.2
(12AWG))
Depending on the
port on the RRU
North
American
standard
Black
NEG
(-)
North
American
standard
Blue
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1483
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
RRU
power
cable
One End
RTN
(+)
The Other End
Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals

(M4, 4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
Color
European
standard
Brown
NEG
(-)
European
standard
Blue
The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable when a DCDU-11B supplies
power to the RRUs.
Cable
RRU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
One End
The Other
End
Color
Remarks
Tool-less female
connector
(pressfit type)
Depending on
the port on the
RRU
North
American/
European
standard
A cable with a
black jacket
and two wires
inside
Black/brown
NEG
(-)
North
American/
European
standard
Blue
When an ETP48100-B1 and DCDU-12B supplies power, the specifications of RRU power
cables are the same, as shown in the following table.
Cable
RRU
power
cable
RTN
(+)
One End
The Other
End
Color
Remarks
EPC5 connector
Depending on
the port on the
RRU
North
American/
European
standard
A cable with a
black jacket
and two wires
inside
Black/brown
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1484
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
One End
The Other
End
NEG
(-)
Color
Remarks
North
American/
European
standard
Blue
NOTE
NOTICE
When routing the RRU power cable on the bottom of the IMB03, do not block the heat dissipation
holes on the IMB03.
Procedure
l
The following figure shows the procedure for installing RRU power cables in an ACpowered IMB.
1.
Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side.
For details about cable connections when the EPS30-4815AF supplies the power,
seeAssembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
For details about cable connections when the ETP48100-B1 supplies the power,
see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable
2.
Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port
on the RRU.
CAUTION
Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must
be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the
3.
Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the power equipment side through
the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment
room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The
installation procedure of ground clip is as follows:
a.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Use a utility knife to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the power cable to
expose the shield layer.
1485
DBS3900
Installation Guide
b.
Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of the power
cable, and use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim off surplus part from the
heads of the cable ties without leaving any sharp edge.
(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 (2) Hole for a cable tie ( 6 mm2 or 0.009
in.2)
in.2)
c.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation tape around
the ground clip.

1486
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Waterproof tape
(2) Insulation tape
(3) Cable tie
(4) Power cable
(5) PGND cable
NOTICE
Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm
(0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie.
4.
Connect the other end of the RRU power cable to the corresponding port on the power
equipment, as shown in Figure 20-73 and Figure 20-74.
When the EPS30-4815AF supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue
and black (or brown) wires of the power cable to the RRU terminal on the
EPS30-4815AF.
When the ETP48100-B1 supplies power, the EPC5 connector on the power cable
is connected to the LOAD1 port on the ETP48100-B1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1487
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-73 Installing an RRU power cable (when an EPS30-4815AF supplies

power)
Figure 20-74 Installing an RRU power cable (when an ETP48100-B1 supplies power)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1488
DBS3900
Installation Guide

NOTE
l When 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied and an

EPS30-4815AF is used, only one RRU is supported. When an ETP48100-B1 supplies
power, three RRUs are supported.
l No surge protection is required for DC power supply. In this case, the maximum length of
an RRU power cable is 5 m (16.4 ft.).
5.
6.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
The following figure shows the procedure for installing RRU power cables in a DCpowered IMB.
1.
Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side.
If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power
Cable on the DCDU Side.
If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector
(Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(2).
If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the
Power Cable.
2.
Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port
on the RRU.
CAUTION
Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must
be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the
3.
Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the power equipment side through
the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment
room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The
installation procedure of ground clip is as follows:
a.
Use a utility knife to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the power cable to
expose the shield layer.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1489
DBS3900
Installation Guide
b.
Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of the power
cable, and use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim off surplus part from the
heads of the cable ties without leaving any sharp edge.
(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 (2) Hole for a cable tie ( 6 mm2 or 0.009
in.2)
in.2)
c.
Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation tape around
the ground clip.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(1) Waterproof tape
(2) Insulation tape
(3) Cable tie
(4) Power cable
(5) PGND cable

1490
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm
(0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie.
4.
Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the
power equipment.
When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC5 connector at one end of
the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-12B.
When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-11B.
When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire
and black or brown wire at one end of the RRU power cable to the NEG(-) and
RTN(+) terminals near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B, respectively,
then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
When -48 V DC power is supplied, three DC multimode RRUs are supported, and the RRU
power cables can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B.
The following figure shows how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a
DCDU-03B. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the RRU is powered by
a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Figure 20-78 Installing an RRU power cable in a DC-powered IMB
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1491
DBS3900
Installation Guide
5.
6.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End


E1/T1 cables transmit E1/T1 signals from the BBU to the external transmission equipment.
Prerequisites
Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then solder a
Context
connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
NOTICE
When the IMB03 is installed on a wall, ensure that the space between the E1/T1 cable and the
GPS clock signal cable is not less than 10 mm (0.39 in.).
Procedure
UMPT/UTRP, as shown in the following figure.
bind them.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1492
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

When a distributed base station is applied to the indoor scenario, the FE/GE Ethernet cables
connect the BBU and the external transmission equipment to transmit the baseband signals.
Context
l
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the UMPT in the BBU, as
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1493
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
NOTE
Station Cables.
simultaneously.
simultaneously.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1494
DBS3900
Installation Guide
to bind them.
ties to bind them.
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1495
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1496
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
NOTICE
respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1497
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
20.5.9 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power

Equipment
This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable
for the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1 when AC power is supplied.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment to the MON1 port on
Step 2 Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the power equipment.
l
When using the EPS30-4815AF, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable
to the RS232 or RS485 port on the PMU of the EPS30-4815AF, as shown in Figure
20-88.
When using the ETP48100-B1, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to
the COM_IN port on the PMU of the ETP48100-B1, as shown in Figure 20-89.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1498
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-88 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment (1)
Figure 20-89 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment (2)
bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1499
DBS3900
Installation Guide
20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist

After the subrack is installed, you need to check whether the hardware is properly installed.
The table lists the standards for checking the hardware.
Table 20-7 Hardware installation checklist
No.
Item
The installation position of each device strictly complies with the

engineering design and meets the requirements for installation clearances.
Sufficient space is reserved for equipment maintenance.
The IMB03, BBU, and auxiliary devices are securely installed, and all
screws are tightened.
The DIP switches on the BBU are correctly set.
None of power cables and PGND cables is short-circuited or reversely

connected. In addition, these cables are not damaged or broken.
There are no connectors or joints on each power cable or PGND cable.
The OT terminals at both ends of each power cable or PGND cable are
securely crimped.
Bare wires and OT terminals connected to the wiring terminals are tightly
wrapped with insulation tapes or heat shrink tubing.
The work grounding and protection grounding of the base station share
one group of ground bodies with the surge protection grounding of the
building.
The connectors of signal cables are intact, and these cables are not damaged
or broken.
10
The distance between the bundled fibers and the BBU panel is between 40
mm (1.57 in.) and 70 mm (2.76 in.). This avoids the interference by the
door.
11
The cable layout facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion, and
the maintenance transfer cable is bound to a cable holder near the BBU.
12
Labels are correct, legible, and complete at both ends of each cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1500
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the IMB03 are correctly connected.
The power supply to the IMB03 meets the requirements of the power system.
The external power supply to the IMB03 is shut off.
Boards, modules, and cables are installed in the cabinet.
Context
NOTICE
Table 20-8 Circuit breakers in an IMB03

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
IMB03
EPS30-4815AF or
ETP48100-B1
l Circuit breaker for the transmission equipment

l Circuit breaker for the RRU
Procedure
Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the IMB03.
Step 3 Set circuit breakers connecting to loads on the power supply devices to ON.
Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply to
components in the cabinet according to the following table.
DANGER
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1501
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cabinet
Component
IMB03
BBU

for 1s).
RRU

NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1502
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
Example
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a DBS3900 in AC scenarios.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1503
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-90 Power-on check process in AC scenarios
The following figure shows the power-on check process for a DBS3900 in DC scenarios.
NOTE
The power-on check processes in DC scenarios for DBS3900s using a DCDU-03B, a DCDU-11B, and a
DCDU-12B are the same.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1504
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-91 Power-on check process in DC scenarios
20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack

This section describes procedures for installing the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack.
Procedure
Step 1 Align the hooks on the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack with the IMB03 slots, as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1505
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 20-92 Installing the cover plate
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M3x8 bolt at the bottom of the cover plate to 0.3 Nm
Figure 20-93 Securing the cover plate
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1506
21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
21

Installed in a TP48600A
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the process for installing components in a TP48600A and related cables
of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TP48600A.
When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors with AC power supply and the BBU is installed in a
TP48600A cabinet, you need to install other components in the TP48600A cabinet and cables.
Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements.
A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and a PGND bar to ensure proper grounding
of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the
onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1507
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1508

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors with AC power supply and the BBU is installed in a
TP48600A cabinet, you need to install other components in the TP48600A cabinet and cables.
Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements.
NOTE
l This section only describes how to install components and cables in the TP48600A cabinet. For details
about how to install the TP48600A cabinet, service outlet unit (SOU), external AC input power cable,
heater, storage batteries, and storage battery-related cables, see the TP48600A-H17B1 Quick
Installation Guide.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1509

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-1 DBS3900 Installation Process
The following figure shows the cable installation process.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1510
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-2 Cable Installation Process

A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and a PGND bar to ensure proper grounding
of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the
Context
l
The equipotential cable between the TP48600A and TMC11H (Ver.C) and between the
TP48600A and IBBS300D/IBBS300T must use OT terminals (M6, 25 mm2 or 0.039 in.2.
The equipotential cable between other types of cabinets must use OT terminals (M6, 35
mm2 or 0.054 in.2).
The PGND cable and equipotential cable need to be prepared onsite. The following table
lists the specifications of the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
CrossSectional
Area
Connector
Color
PGND cable
35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
OT terminal (M6)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable
25 mm2 or 35
mm2 (0.039
in.2 or 0.054
in.2)
OT terminal (M6)
Green and yellow

1511
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Procedure
1.
Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground busbar.
2.
Route the other end of the PGND cable into the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the
TP48600A, and connect the cable to the ground bar in the TP48600A.
NOTICE
When installing the PGND cable, ensure that the OT terminals on the PGND cable are oriented
correctly and that the screws are tightened to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1512
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
(2) Ground bar for the site

1.
Connect one end of the cable to the ground bar in the TP48600A.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the ground bar in a second cabinet.
Figure 21-5 Installing an equipotential cable (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1513

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-6 Installing an equipotential cable (2)
bind them.
----End


Context
l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1514

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1515

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
or IMB03.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1516

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1517

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.

3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1518

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
following figure.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1519

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Context
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1520

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1521
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A

Context
l
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Surge protection
transfer cable for
the monitoring
signals
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Gray shielded
straight-through
cable

monitoring signal
cable
Bare wire
Depending on the
external equipment
Procedure
1.
2.

NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1522

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1523

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
figure.
1.
2.
3.
Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in the following figure.
Step 5 Install external dry contact monitoring signal cables for the SLPU, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Cut the external dry contact alarm cable to length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the SLPU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1524
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
3.
Use a screwdriver to press the bulge of the connector, insert the bare wire of the cable into
the connector, and then move the screwdriver away. Pull the cable slightly to check whether
it is securely connected.
Figure 21-25 Installing the external dry contact monitoring signal cables for the SLPU
bind them.
----End
21.4.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB

When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customized alarm inputs, you need to install the
Context
l

Cable
EMUA/
EMUB
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RTN(+)
wire
Color
One End
The Other End
Black
EPC4 connector
Cord end terminal

1525

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Cable
power
cable
Color
NEG(-)
wire
EMUA/EMUB
One End
The Other End
DB9 male connector
RJ45 connector
Blue
Black
Procedure
1.
2.

NOTE
NOTE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1526

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

1.
2.
Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1527

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 5 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Add a connector to the end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the Cord End
Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
3.
Add a corresponding connector to the other end of the cables according to the type of the
base station, and connect the connector to the corresponding installation position, as listed
in the following table.
Table 21-4 Installation position of the EMUA/EMUB power cables
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Base Station
Type
Application
Scenario
Method of
Adding a
Connector
Installation
Position
BTS3900AL
(Ver.A)
Assembling the
EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable
LOAD 1 port on
DCDU-12C
DBS3900
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TP48600A cabinet.
Assembling the
Tool-Less Female
Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the
Power Cable(1)
LOAD 2 port on
DCDU-11C

1528
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-30 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cables
4.
ties to bind them.
5.
1.
Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the cable to the RS-485 port on the EMUA
or COM_485 port on the EMUB.
2.
Install the other end of the cable according to whether the HAU is configured, as listed in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1529

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 21-5 Method of installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable

Base Station
Type
Application
Scenario
Configuration of
the HAU
Installation
Method
BTS3900AL
(Ver.A)
An HAU is
configured.
1. Remove the
screws from the
cover plate of
the HAU
maintenance
compartment
and open the
cover plate of
the
compartment.
2. Route the RJ45
connector at the
other end of the
cable through
the cable hole on
the cover plate
into the HAU
and connect the
cables to the
vacant
COM_OUT
port on the
HAU.
3. Close the cover
plate and tighten
the screws on it.
DBS3900
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The EMUA/EMUB
is installed in the
TP48600A cabinet.
No HAU is
configured.
Connect the RJ45

connector at the
other end of the
cable to the
D_COM3 port on
the CCU.
No HAU is
configured.
Connect the RJ45

connector at the
other end of the
cable to the
D_COM3 port on
the CCU.

1530
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1531

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
3.
ties to bind them.
4.
----End

Context
NOTE
l This section describes the procedure for installing a GPS surge protector in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet
and TP48600A cabinet. The procedures for installing GPS surge protectors in the BTS3900AL DC
cabinet and BTS3900AL AC cabinet are the same.
l A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that uses two satellite cards. To install a
satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.
Procedure
following figure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1532

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
(1) Satellite card
(5.31 lbfin.).
Step 4 Install the GPS clock signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Secure the Type N female connector at one end of the cable onto the support for the GPS
surge protector.
2.
Connect the SMA male connector at the other end of the cable to the GPS port on the USCU
in the BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1533
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
NOTE
(1) Support for the GPS surge protector
(2) Washer
(3) Nut
(4) BBU
Step 5 Install the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use an inner hexagon wrench to connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable
for the GPS surge protector to the ground terminal for the GPS surge protector until the
tightening torque ranges from 6 Nm (53.1 lbfin.) to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
2.
Use a wrench to secure the Protect port on the GPS surge protector onto the Type N female
connector at one end of the GPS signal cable until the tightening torque reaches 1 Nm (8.85
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector to the ground bar for
the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1534
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Step 6 Install the GPS jumper, as shown in the following figure.

1.
2.
Install a Type N50 straight male connector at each end of the cable according to the
instructions in Installing the Type N Coaxial Connector.
3.
Connect one end of the cable to the Type N female connector on the Surge port on the GPS
surge protector.
4.
Route the other end of the cable out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of the cabinet,
and connect the cable to an external GPS antenna.
5.
Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1535

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End
21.4.4 Installing a DCDU

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed at a site to supply power to RRUs.
Context
The DCDU supplying power to RRUs varies depending on the base station. A BTS3900AL can
use the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. A TP48600A can use the DCDU-03B or
DCDU-11B.
l
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is installed in the same position in a cabinet.

It is preferentially installed in the left slot.
Figure 21-37 Position of a DCDU
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
The accessory bag containing the short-circuiting copper bars for the DCDU is bound to
the slot in which the DCDU is to be installed. The following figure shows different shortcircuiting copper bars for different DCDUs.

1536
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-38 Short-circuiting copper bars for DCDUs
(1) Short-circuiting copper bars

for the DCDU-12B

for the DCDU-11B

for the DCDU-03B
NOTE
The procedures for installing all types of DCDUs are the same. This section describes the procedure for installing
a DCDU-12B in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a base station is powered on, turn off the upper-level circuit breakers for the DCDU.
Otherwise, skip this step.
1.
Optional: If a DCDU has been installed in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet to supply power to

RRUs, modify the management status to block all RRUs. For detailed operations, see RRU
Hardware Maintenance Guide. Otherwise, skip this step.
2.
Turn off the upper-level circuit breakers for the DCDU.
Step 2 Remove the two screws from the metal protective cover for the BusBar, and raise the cover to
remove it, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-39 Removing the protective cover
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1537

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Remove the filler panel from the slot in which the DCDU is to be installed, and take the shortcircuiting copper bars out of the slot.
Step 4 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-40 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU
Step 5 Hold the DCDU with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears on both
sides of the DCDU contact the columns.
Step 6 Align the holes on the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU with the holes on the columns,
and insert and tighten four M6 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-41 Installing a DCDU
Step 7 Remove the plastic protective cover for the input terminals from the DCDU.
Step 8 Install the short-circuiting copper bars for the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1538

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-42 Installing the short-circuiting copper bars
Step 9 Install the removed plastic protective cover onto the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-43 Installing the plastic protective cover onto the DCDU
Step 10 Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to remove one or two parts from the metal protective cover for
the BusBar corresponding to the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1539

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-44 Removing one or two parts from the metal protective cover
Step 11 Install the protective cover onto the BusBar, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-45 Installing the protective cover onto the BusBar
----End
21.4.5 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T

When an outdoor base station requires the medium- to long-term backup power, you need to
configure one IBBS700D or IBBS700T and install storage batteries in the IBBS700D or
IBBS700T cabinet.
Context
There are eight power cables for storage batteries. One end of the power cables has already been
connected to the power distribution box before delivery. The installation personnel only need
to connect the other end of the power cables to the storage batteries onsite.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1540

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
DANGER
l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of storage batteries and to
ensure personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the input power device has been turned off. If the BAT
circuit breaker is turned on, an excessively large current may occur.
figure.
NOTE
NOTE
You need to install the positive cables first and then the negative cables for the storage batteries when
installing the power cables for the storage batteries.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1541

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries, and use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the screws.
3.
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black wire to the BTA(-) on the power
distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M8 screw to 8 Nm (70.81
lbfin.). Then connect the OT terminal at the other end to the negative poles of the storage
battery and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.
4.
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the red wire to the BTA(+) on the power
distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M8 screw to 8 Nm (70.81
lbfin.). Then connect the OT terminal at the other end to the positive poles of the storage
battery and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.
5.
Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.

NOTE
Serial connection copper bars between storage batteries and wiring terminals for storage batteries use the same
screws, which are either M6 or M8 screws. The torque used for an M6 screws is 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.) and the
torque used for an M8 screw is 14 Nm (123.91 lbfin.).
bind them.
----End
21.4.6 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T

batteries and the power cables in the battery cabinet (IBBS300D/IBBS300T).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1542

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
DANGER
personal safety.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that the input and output power switches on the storage batteries has been turned off. If
the switches are turned on, an excessively large current may occur.
Step 2 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Figure 21-48 Installing storage batteries
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the
DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the screw to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable
to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw.
1543
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
2.
Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on the circuit breaker
in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on
the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.
NOTE
There are two types of screws for copper bars and wiring terminals on storage batteries, M6 and M8. They are
tightened to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.) and 14 Nm (123.90 lbfin.), respectively.
Figure 21-49 Installing power cables for storage batteries
Step 4 Install copper bars for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1544

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-50 Installing copper bars for storage batteries
Step 5 Close the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.
----End

onsite.

interference.
NOTE

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1545

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
in a straight line.
l

l

l
out underground.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1546
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1547
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1548

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1549

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1550

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1551

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
21.5.2 Routing Cables Out of a Cabinet

This section describes cable routing through the cable bags in a cabinet and methods for sealing
the cable bags.
Cable Bags in the TP48600A

The following figure shows cable bags in the TP48600A.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1552

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-59 Plan view of the cable bags in the TP48600A
Table 21-6 describes the cable routing at the cable bags in the TP48600A.
Table 21-6 Cable routing through the cable bags
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Description
Cable
bag 1
Used for routing RRU power cables
Cable
bag 2
Used for routing RRU power cables, monitoring signal cables, and IBBS700D or
IBBS700T DC input power cables
Cable
bag 3
Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, transmission
cables, and TMC11H (Ver.C) DC input power cables
Cable
bag 4
Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables and external AC input power cables
Cable
bag 5
Used for routing RRU power cables
Cable
bag 6
Used for routing RRU power cables, monitoring signal cables, IBBS700D or
IBBS700T DC input power cables, and red wires of power cables for the IBBS700D
or IBBS700T
Cable
bag 7
Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, black wires of power cables for the
IBBS700D or IBBS700T, GPS jumpers, transmission cables, and TMC11H (Ver.C)
DC input power cables
Cable
bag 8
Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, external AC input power cables, and the
AC power cable for the junction box

1553

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
l If the space in cable bags 1 and 5 is insufficient, RRU power cables can be routed through cable bags 2 and
6.
l If the space in cable bags 4 and 8 is insufficient, CPRI fiber optic cables can be routed through cable bags
3 and 7.
Installing Cable Bags in the TP48600A

Route cables through the bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten the bags tightly around the
cables, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-60 Installing cable bags
CAUTION
You need to hold the cable bag and route cables through the cable bag slowly so that cables will
not puncture the cable bag.

Installing Power Cables from the TP48600A to TMC11H (Ver.C)

Power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H (Ver.C) consist of the DCDU-11C power
cables and the power cables for the AC junction box. The power cables feed power from the
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1554

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
TP48600A into the TMC11H (Ver.C). The power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H
(Ver.C) are optional. They are delivered with the TMC11H (Ver.C).
Context
There are two types of power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H (Ver.C). Both types
need to be prepared onsite. The following table lists the specifications of the cables.
Cable
DCDU11C
power
cables
RTN(+)
Power
cables
for an
AC
junction
box
One End
The Other End
Color
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Power series 120

connector
Black (in most regions)

or blue (in other
regions)
NEG(-)
Blue (in most regions)

or gray (in other
regions)
OT terminal (M4,
2.5 mm2 or 0.004
in.2)
OT terminal (M4, 2.5

mm2 or 0.004 in.2)
PE
Brown
Blue
Green and yellow
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables.
1.
2.
Route the cables through a cable bag into the TP48600A.
3.
Install connectors at both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling
the Power Series 120 Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal
and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-11C power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the power series 120 connector at one end of the cable to the LOAD2 terminal on
the left side of the TP48600A.
2.
Route the cables into the cable hole on the bottom left side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).
3.
Remove the left plastic protective cover for the DCDU-11C in the TMC11H (Ver.C).
4.
Connect the OT terminals on the other end of the cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
on the terminal block for the DCDU-11C.
5.
Replace the plastic protective cover.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1555
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-61 Installing the DCDU-11C power cables
(1) Plastic protective cover
(2) Cable outlet module
(3) DCDU-11C
(4) ETP48400
Step 3 Install the power cables for the junction boxes, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the shells of all the AC junction boxes.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the
AC junction box in the TP48600A.
3.
Route the cables into the cable hole on the bottom left side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).
4.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L, N, and PE terminals in the
AC junction box in the TMC11H (Ver.C).
5.
Reinstall the shells of all the AC junction boxes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1556

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-62 Power cables for an AC junction box
(1) Shell of an AC junction box
(2) AC junction box
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and the IBBS700D or IBBS700T
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables at a site where
an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is configured.
Prerequisites
Check that the BAT switch on the ETP48400 in the TP48600A has been turned off. If the BAT
switch is turned on, an excessively large current may occur.
Context
Power cables from the TP48600A to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T consist of power cables for
the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, power cables for the power distribution box, and power cables for
the junction box. These cables need to be prepared onsite. The following table lists the
specifications of the cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1557

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Cable
One End
Power cables
for the
IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
RTN(+)
Power cables
for the power
distribution
box
RTN(+)
Power cables
for an AC
junction box
NEG(-)
The Other
End

0.077 in.2)
Red

(pressfit type)
Black (in most regions)

or blue (in other
regions)
NEG(-)
Color
Black
Blue (in most regions)

or gray (in other
regions)
0.004 in.2)
PE
Brown
Blue
Green and yellow
DANGER
All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent the batteries from burning and ensure
personal safety.
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Route the cables through a cable bag into the TP48600A.
3.
Install connectors at both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling
the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1) and Assembling
Step 2 Install two groups of power cables for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Remove the shells of all the DC junction boxes.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the terminals of the DC junction box.
3.
Route the cables into the cable holes on both sides at the bottom of the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1558

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
4.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cables to the NEG(-)_0, RTN(+)_0, NEG
(-)_1, and RTN(+)_1 terminals in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or
IBBS200T.
5.
Reinstall the shells of all the DC junction boxes.
Figure 21-63 Installing power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T
(1) Shell of a DC junction box
(2) DC junction box
(3) Cable bag
(4) Power distribution box
Step 3 Install the power cables for the power distribution box, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Insert one end of the cable into the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.
2.
Route the cable into the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the battery cabinet.
3.
Insert the other end of the cable into the DC INPUT port on the power distribution box in
the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1559
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-64 Power cables for the power distribution box
Step 4 Install the power cables for the junction boxes, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the shells of all the AC junction boxes.
2.
Connect one end of the cables to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in
the TP48600A.
3.
Connect the other end of the cables to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction boxes
in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
4.
Route the cables into the cable hole at the bottom left of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
5.
Reinstall the shells of all the AC junction boxes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1560

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-65 Power cables for an AC junction box
(2) AC junction box
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(TP48600A:IBBS=1:1)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables when a site is
configured with one IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Prerequisites
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables between the TP48600A and
IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1561

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 21-9 Specifications of the power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/
IBBS300T
Cable
Color
One End
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black

0.054 in.2)
Fan power
RTN(+)
cable in the
IBBS300D
NEG(-)
and TEC
power cable in
the IBBS300T
Black
Power cable
for an AC
junction box
(optional)
Brown
N wire
Blue
Power cables
for the
IBBS300D/
IBBS300T
Blue
OT terminal
(M4, 2.5
mm2 or
0.004 in.2)
The Other
End
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)

0.002 in.2)
DANGER
All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent the batteries from burning and ensure
personal safety.
NOTE
Procedure
1.
2.
Route the cable through a cable bag into the TP48600A.
3.
detailed operations, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable(1) and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the shells of all DC junction boxes.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the wiring terminal in the DC
junction box labeled NEG(-) on the left of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and connect the OT
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1562

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
terminal at one end of the red cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled
RTN(+) on the right of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screws to 8 Nm (70.81
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black cable to the terminal in the DC junction
box in the inner left side of the TP48600A, and connect the OT terminal at the other end
of the red cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner right side of the
TP48600A. Then, tighten the screws to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
4.
Reinstall the protective covers for power input terminals and tighten screws on them to 0.3
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Step 3 Install the power cables for the fan assemblies in the IBBS300Ds, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end to the LOAD9 port
on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1563
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-67 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly
Step 4 Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten
the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
3.
to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A and use an M4
torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1564

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-68 Installing the power cable for the AC junction box
(2) AC junction box
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

(TP48600A:IBBS=1:2)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables when a site is
configured with two IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.
Prerequisites
Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables between the TP48600A and
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1565

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 21-10 Specifications of the power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2)
OT terminal (M8,
35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 2.5 mm2
or 0.004 in.2)
Tool-less female
connector (pressfit
type)
Power cables for

the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T
RTN(+)
Red
NEG(-)
Black
Power cables for

the fan in an
IBBS300D, fan
power cables
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ds,
power cables for
the TEC in an
IBBS300T, and
TEC power
cables between
cascaded
IBBS300Ts
RTN(+)
Black
NEG(-)
Blue
Power cable for

the AC junction
box (optional)
and cascading
power cable for
the AC junction
box (optional)
Brown
N wire
Blue
OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or 0.002

in.2)
NOTE
l The method of installing the TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ts is the same as the method
of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds. This section describes the method of
installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
1.
2.
Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to Table 21-10.
For detailed operations, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type)
and the Power Cable(1) and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1566

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Install two groups of power cables for the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
Remove the shells of all DC junction boxes.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the wiring terminal in the DC
junction box labeled NEG(-) on the left of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and connect the OT
terminal at one end of the red cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled
RTN(+) on the right of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screws to 8 Nm (70.81
lbfin.).
3.
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black cable to the terminal in the DC junction
box in the inner left side of the TP48600A, and connect the OT terminal at the other end
of the red cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner right side of the
TP48600A. Then, tighten the screws to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin.).
4.
Reinstall the protective covers for power input terminals and tighten screws on them to 0.3
Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
Step 3 Install the power cables for the fan assemblies in the IBBS300Ds, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1567
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-70 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly
1.
box in the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
2.
box in the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1568
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-71 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds
Step 5 Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten
the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
3.
to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A and use an M4
torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1569
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-72 Installing the power cable for the AC junction box
(2) AC junction box
Step 6 Optional: Install the cascading power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following
figure.
1.
2.
L1, N1, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the basic IBBS300D/IBBS300T and
use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
3.
to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the extension IBBS300D/IBBS300T
and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1570

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-73 Installing the cascading power cable for AC junction boxes
bind them.
----End

The BBU power cable in the TP48600A feeds power from the DCDU-11C into the BBU.
Context
l
When installing the second BBU in the capacity expansion scenario, BBU 1 is installed
below BBU 0. For details about the installation scenario, see Outdoor Installation Scenarios
with AC Power Supply. The following description is based on the configuration of two
BBUs.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
BBU power cable
3V3 connector

(pressfit type)

1571

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased
Procedure
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. A tool-less female
connector (pressfit type) must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
Step 2 Install the power cable for BBU 0, as shown in the following figure.
1.
UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
on the DCDU-11C.
NOTE
equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables
are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) at
the other end are connected to the LOAD4 and LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11C.
Step 3 Install the power cable for BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1.
UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
on the DCDU-11C.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1572

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables
are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) at
the other end are connected to the LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports on the DCDU-11C.
bind them.
----End

This section describes how to install RRU power cables which feed power from a TP48600A
into RRUs when a DCDU-12B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B is configured.
Context
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1573

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide

Power
Equipmen
t
Cable
DCDU-03B
RRU
powe
r
cable
DCDU-11B
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN
(+)
Black (North
American
standard)
Depending on
the port on the
RRU
NEG
(-)
Blue (North
American
standard)
Bent by 90 degrees,
OT terminals (M4, 3.3
mm2 or 0.005 in.2
(12AWG))
RTN
(+)
Brown
(European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
(European
standard)
RTN
(+)
Black (North
American
standard)
Bent by 90 degrees,
OT terminals (M4, 4
mm2 or 0.006 in.2)
Tool-less female
connector (pressfit
type)
Brown
(European
standard)
DCDU-12B
NEG
(-)
Blue
RTN
(+)
Black (North
American
standard)
EPC5 connector
Brown
(European
standard)
NEG
(-)
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Strip 600 mm (23.62 in.) long insulation layer and shield layer from one end of the RRU power
cable to expose two coated wires. At the position 750 mm (29.53 in.) away from the end of the
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1574

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
RRU power cable, strip 50 mm (1.97 in.) long insulation layer off the power cable to expose the
shield layer, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-76 Stripping the RRU power cable
Step 2 Route an RRU power cable into the cabinet through a cable bag.
Step 3 Attach a ground clip to the shield layers of the RRU power cables and tighten the M6 screw on
the ground clip to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side.
l If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on
the DCDU Side.
l If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the Power Cable(2).
l If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1575
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
NOTICE
CAUTION
Step 6 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the power
equipment, as shown in the following figure. The following figure shows how to install an RRU
power cable when the DCDU-11B supplies power.
l When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black
or brown wire at the other end of the RRU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals,
respectively, near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B, tighten the M4 screw to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.), .
l When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-11B.
l When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the
power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-12B.
NOTE
An RRU power cable can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B or
DCDU-11B or can be connected to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals near any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5
silkscreens the DCDU-03B.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1576

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End


The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and surge protection
unit for transferring surge protection signals.
Context
For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1577

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Install the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the DB26 connector at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the
E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, UTRP, or WMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the
plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the DB25 connector at the other end of the E1/T1 cable to the INSIDE port on the
UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
bind them.
----End

Prerequisites
Context
For cable connections in other scenarios, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900
Series Base Station Cables.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure
21-80 or Figure 21-81.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1578
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-80 Installing the E1/T1 cable (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1579

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-81 Installing the E1/T1 cables (2)
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable hole on the bottom left of the cabinet.
bind them.
----End

The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and UFLP for
transferring surge protection signals.
Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For details
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1580

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Install the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the
FE/GE0 port on the UMPT/LMPT or to the FE/GE port on the UTRP.
2.
Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/
GE1 port near the INSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPB.
bind them.
----End

Context
l
This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For details
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the OUTSIDE
silkscreen on the UFLPb, as shown in Figure 21-83 or Figure 21-84.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1581
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-83 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable (1)
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1582
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Figure 21-84 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables (2)
Step 2 Install a ground clip onto the FE/GE Ethernet cable at a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) from
the cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 21-85.
1.
Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cable, and strip a length of 50
mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the shield layer.
2.
Loosen the screw on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.
3.
Attach the ground clip to the shield layer of the FE/GE Ethernet cable and tighten the M6
screw on the ground clip to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1583

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable hole on
the bottom left of the cabinet, and then lay out the cable along the left of the cabinet interior.
bind them.
----End

Context
l
labeled as MM.
The SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two
ports cannot be used simultaneously.
The SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the
two ports cannot be used simultaneously.
The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the
cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1584

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
board in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1585

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the left side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties
to bind them.
bind them.
----End

(Optional) Installing a CCU-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a CCU-BBU monitoring
signal cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1586

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
When two BBUs are configured, the monitoring signal cable for BBU0 is connected to the
U_COM0 port on the CCU, and the the monitoring signal cable for BBU1 is connected to the
U_COM1 port on the CCU.
NOTE
The following description uses the CCU-BBU monitoring signal cable for BBU0 as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the U_COM0 port on the CCU, as shown in the following figure.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU or UEIU in BBU0, as shown
Figure 21-89 Installing the CCU-BBU monitoring signal cable
NOTE
When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected to the
MON0 port on one of the boards, and the MON0 ports on the other boards are not used. Do not connect the
MON1 port to the CCU.
bind it.
----End
(Optional) Installing a CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C)
monitoring signal cable.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1587

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the TMC11H (Ver.C), as shown
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the D_COM7 port on the CCU in the TP48600A.
2.
Route the cable out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the TP48600A and into the
cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).
3.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the TMC11H
(Ver.C).
Figure 21-90 Installing the CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C) monitoring signal cable
(1) CMUE
(2) CCU
(3) Cable bag in the TP48600A
(4) Cable outlet module in the TMC11H (Ver.C)
bind it.
----End
(Optional) Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable between the CCU and IBBS700D
or between the CCU and the IBBS700T
This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable
between the CCU and the IBBS700D or between the CCU and the IBBS700T. The IBBS700D
or IBBS700T is shortened to the battery cabinet in this document.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1588

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the battery cabinet, as shown in
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU in the TP48600A.
2.
cable bag on the bottom left side of the battery cabinet.
3.
Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU in the battery cabinet.
Figure 21-91 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the IBBS700D or
between the CCU and the IBBS700T
(1) CCU
(2) Cable bag
bind it.
----End
(Optional) Installing a CCU-IBBS300D/IBBS300T Monitoring Signal Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the CCU-IBBS300D/
IBBS300T monitoring signal cable. The IBBS300D/IBBS300T is shortened to the battery
cabinet in this document.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1589
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the battery cabinet, as shown in
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU in the TP48600A.
2.
cable bag on the bottom left side of the battery cabinet.
3.
Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU in the battery cabinet.
Figure 21-92 Installing the CCU-IBBS300D/IBBS300T monitoring signal cable
(1) Cabinet control unit (CCU)
(2) Cable bag
Step 2 Optional: When a TP48600A is configured with two IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, one additional
CCU01D-03 cascading monitoring signal cable is required, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the upper
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the
lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1590

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-93 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
bind them.
----End

station.
Prerequisites
l
NOTE
as MM.
is black or gray.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1591

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Maximum rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1592

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
supported.
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1593

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1594

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind it.
----End

Context
NOTE
black or gray.
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1595

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
1.
LBBP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
NOTICE
respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1596

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End


No.
Item
design.
21.8.2 Repainting.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1597
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A

No.
Item

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1598
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
No.
Item
13

No.
Item
the same direction.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1599
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the TP48600A are correctly connected.
The power supply to the TP48600A meets the requirements of the power system.
External power supply to the TP48600A has been shut off.
All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDU in the TMC11H are set to OFF.
All circuit breakers in the power distribution box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T are set to
OFF.
All circuit breakers in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T are set to OFF.
Context
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1600

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Table 21-18 Circuit breakers in a TP48600A

Cabinet
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
TP48600A
PDU05A-03, ETP,
DCDU-03B,
DCDU-11B, or
DCDU-11C
l Circuit breakers, such as PSU1/5, PSU2/6, and

PSU3/4/7, on the PDU05A-03 control power
inputs to the PSU.
l The HEATER circuit breaker on the
PDU05A-03 controls power inputs to the HAU
in a TP48600A, a TMC11H (Ver.C), or a
battery cabinet.
l The SERVICE OUTLET 10A MAX circuit
breaker on the PDU05A-03 controls power
outputs from the SOU.
l LOAD0 to LOAD5 on the ETP control power
inputs to the DCDU in the TP48600A,
TMC11H (Ver.C), and components in the
TMC11H (Ver.C).
l The BAT circuit breaker on the ETP controls
the power supply from the storage batteries to
other components in the TP48600A or battery
cabinet.
l Switches SW0 to SW9 on 0# and 1#
DCDU-11Bs (Switches SW0 to SW5 control
power inputs to RRU 0 to RRU 11.)
l Switches SW0 to SW9 on the DCDU-11C
(Switches SW0 to SW5 control power inputs to
transmission equipment. Switches SW6 to
SW9 control power inputs to the BBU 0, BBU
1, CMUF, FAU02D_07, and power distribution
box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.)
IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
Power distribution box
l The FAN, CCU, and TEC-SW switches in the

power distribution box in the battery cabinet
controls power inputs to the CCU and CMUF.
NOTE
Operation Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1601

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 2 Optional: If a site is configured with battery cabinets, set the BAT circuit breakers on the ETP
and circuit breakers in the power distribution box in the battery cabinets to ON. Otherwise, skip
this step.
Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the TP48600A and battery cabinet.
Step 4 Set the power circuit breakers connecting loads on the PDU05A to ON, and check the power
supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1602
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
DANGER
Table 21-19 Normal status of the components powered by the PDU05A

Cabinet
Component
TP48600A
PMU
PSU

IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
HAU
The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
HAU
Step 5 Set the power switches connected to loads on the ETP to ON.
Step 6 Set the power switches connected to loads on each DCDU in the cabinet to ON.
Cabinet
Componen
t
TP48600A
BBU

for 1s).
Battery
cabinet
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Fan or TEC
in the front
door
The fan or TEC is working properly.
CMUF or
CMUEA

1603

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
CCU
The RUN indicator is steady on or blinking (on for 0.125s

and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
CCU01D-03
The RUN indicator is steady on or blinking (on for 0.125s

and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
Fan in the
front door
FAN 02B
RRU
NOTE
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet


BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1604

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End

21.8.1 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base

After all cables are installed, you need to seal all the cable holes on the base.
Procedure
Step 1 Check that all cable bags are fastened.
Step 2 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base of the TP48600A/BTS3900AL/IBBS700D/IBBS700T
1.
Use baffle plates to fill the empty space in the cable holes.
2.
Install the front cover plate for the base. Tighten the three M6 countersunk screws on the
cover plate to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1605

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 21-104 Sealing the cable holes on the base of the TP48600A, BTS3900AL, IBBS700D,
or IBBS700T
(2) Baffle plate
----End
21.8.2 Repainting
be repaired.
Prerequisites
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
Intended
Object
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U

1606

TP48600A
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
figures.
NOTICE
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1607
DBS3900
Installation Guide

TP48600A
30 minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1608
22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22

Installed in an IBC10
About This Chapter

This section describes the procedure for installing the cabinet, components, and cables in a DC
scenario where BBUs are installed in an IBC10.
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The clearances are
This section describes the process for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900. The process includes
checking pre-installed modules and cables, installing a cabinet, installing a PGND cable, prerouting CPRI fiber optic cables, installing components, installing cables, checking the installed
cabinet, and performing a power-on check.
This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor or an ESD floor.
This section describes the procedure for installing a PGND cable. A PGND cable connects a
PGND screw on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet.
22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables
This section describes the procedure for pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables.
This section describes the procedure for installing components in an IBC10.
This section describes the procedure for installing cables in an IBC10.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1609
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
This section describes the procedure for powering on an IBC10 and handling failures in the
power supply to internal components in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1610

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The clearances are
The cabinet can be installed on a concrete floor or an ESD floor, requiring the same clearance.
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900.
l
The minimum clearance between the front of a cabinet and that of another cabinet must be
1,400 mm (55.12 in.).
The minimum clearance between the wall and the nearest cabinet must be 800 mm (31.50
in.).
The passage in the equipment room has a minimum width of 800 mm (31.50 in.).
Figure 22-1 Installation clearance requirements

This section describes the process for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900. The process includes
checking pre-installed modules and cables, installing a cabinet, installing a PGND cable, prerouting CPRI fiber optic cables, installing components, installing cables, checking the installed
cabinet, and performing a power-on check.
The following figure shows the process for installing an IBC10 which is used for a DBS3900.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1611

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor or an ESD floor.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1612

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor (Using Expansion

Bolt Assemblies)
This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet using expansion bolt assemblies on
a concrete floor.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the holes for installing the cabinet according to the anchor points on the marking-off
template, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l The marking-off template is made of paper and is prone to deformation. Before using the marking-off
template, check whether it is deformed based on the dimensions specified in engineering design documents.
If it is deformed, use a ruler to determine the positions for expansion bolt assemblies.
l Ensure that the semicircle notch of the marking-off template indicates the front of the cabinet.
Figure 22-3 Determining the position of the cabinet
(2) Anchor point
Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1613

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) M12x60 bolt
1.
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Expansion tube
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm to
60 mm (2.05 in. to 2.36 in.).
CAUTION
2.
the distances between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new
3.
4.
Use a rubber mallet to hit the expansion bolt assembly until the expansion tube completely
enters the hole.
5.
Remove the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1614

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
CAUTION
Step 3 Install the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Place the cabinet on the planned position. Align the installation holes on the cabinet with
the holes for expansion bolt assemblies.
2.
Fit the spring washers, flat washers, and insulation washers on the four bolts. Vertically
insert the bolts through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet into the expansion tubes,
and partially tighten the bolts.
3.
Push an insulation plate to the bottom of the cabinet from the front and rear directions to
ensure that the notch on the plates holds the expansion bolt assemblies.
Figure 22-5 Installing a cabinet
Step 4 Level and secure the cabinet.

1.
Use a level and plummet apparatus to check whether the cabinet is level or vertical,
respectively.
2.
If the cabinet is not level, use a socket wrench to adjust the leveling bolts.
3.
After the cabinet is leveled, use a torque wrench to tighten the four expansion bolts to 45
Nm (398.28 lbfin.).
NOTE
A leveling foot can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm (0 in. to 0.39 in.).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1615

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-6 Leveling and securing the cabinet
Step 5 Check the insulation between the ground bolts and expansion bolts.
1.
Set the multimeter to the megohm scale (M).
2.
Measure the resistance between the ground bolts and expansion bolts, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 22-7 Measuring the resistance between the ground bolts and expansion bolts
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1616

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
l If the resistance is less than 5 megohms, the cabinet is not insulated from the ground.
Go to Step 5.3.
l If the resistance is greater than or equal to 5 megohms, the cabinet is insulated from the
ground.
3.
Remove the expansion bolt assemblies and check whether the insulation washers are
missing or damaged.
l If yes, reinstall the expansion bolt assemblies and re-level the base.
l If no, check whether the multimeter works properly and whether the setting is correct.
----End
22.3.2 Installing a Cabinet on an ESD Floor

This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor.
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the support height, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use a ruler to measure the distance between the concrete floor and the upper surface of the
ESD floor.
2.
Adjust the support to the required height based on the measurement results and the scale
on the support.
3.
Partially tighten height-locking bolts on both sides of the support.
Figure 22-8 Adjusting the support height
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1617

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Step 2 Check whether the six M8x20 bolt assemblies are securely tightened. If no, use a torque socket
to tighten them to 13 Nm (115.06 lbfin).
Step 3 Assemble and level the supports, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Use eight M8x20 bolt assemblies to assemble an expansion lever and two supports. Ensure
that the protruding side of a guide rail faces outwards. Then, use a torque socket to tighten
all bolt assemblies to 13 Nm (115.06 lbfin).
2.
Use a level to check whether the support is level. If no, loosen the height-locking bolts
slightly to adjust the support until it is level.
3.
Use a torque socket to tighten the height-locking bolts to 45 Nm (398.28 lbfin).
Figure 22-9 Assembling and leveling the support
Step 4 Remove the ESD floor from the position for installing a cabinet and remove the support beams.
Step 5 Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the cabinet installation hole
diagram or the marking-off template, and use a marker to mark the positions for installing screws.
For details, see Step 1 in section "Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor". The following
figure shows the position for a support.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1618

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-10 Determining the support position
Step 6 Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in
(1) M12x60 bolt
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube
1619
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
1.
Use a hammer drill with a 16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm to
60 mm (2.05 in. to 2.36 in.).
CAUTION
2.
the distances between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new
3.
4.
Use a rubber mallet to hit the expansion bolt assembly until the expansion tube completely
enters the hole.
5.
Remove the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.
CAUTION
Step 7 Install the support, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Align installation holes on the support with expansion bolt assembly holes on the floor and
secure four M12x60 expansion bolt assemblies (each consists of a spring washer, flat
washer, insulation washer, and a bolt).
2.
Correct the support position, and use a level to check whether the support is level.
3.
If no, add spacers under the support.
4.
Use a torque socket to tighten the four expansion bolts to 45 Nm (398.28 lbfin).
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1620
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Figure 22-12 Installing the support
Step 8 Install the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Place the cabinet on the support and align the installation holes on the cabinet with those
on the support.
2.
Fit spring washers, flat washers, and insulation washers on the four M12x40 bolts. Insert
the bolt assemblies into the installation holes on the cabinet and support, and tighten them
to 45 Nm (398.28 lbfin).
3.
Push two insulation plates to the bottom of the cabinet from the front and rear directions
to ensure that the notch on the plates holds the M12x40 bolts.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1621

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-13 Installing a cabinet
Step 9 Check the insulation between the ground bolts and M12x40 bolts.
1.
Set the multimeter to the megohm scale (M).
2.
Measure the resistance between the ground bolts and M12x40 bolts, as shown in the
following figure.
l If the resistance is less than 5 megohms, the cabinet is not insulated from the ground.
Go to Step 9.3.
l If the resistance is greater than or equal to 5 megohms, the cabinet is insulated from the
ground.
3.
Remove the expansion bolt assemblies and check whether the insulation washers are
missing or damaged.
l If yes, reinstall the expansion bolt assemblies and re-level the cabinet.
l If no, check whether the multimeter works properly and whether the setting is correct.
Step 10 Use the M12x25 screw assemblies to secure the front and rear pallets to the support.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1622

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-14 Securing front and rear pallets
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing a PGND cable. A PGND cable connects a
PGND screw on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet.
Context
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable for an IBC10.
Cable
One End
The Other
End
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Wire
Color
PGND cable
OT terminal
(M8)
OT terminal
(M8)
l 16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2
Green and
yellow
l 25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1623
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
NOTE
l The colors and structures of the PGND cable in this document are for reference only, which may differ
from those of the cables onsite.
l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
l The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.
l Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
Procedure
1.
2.

1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bolt on the top side of an IBC10, and
use a torque screwdriver to tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70.81 lbfin).
2.
Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground bar.
NOTE
22-15.
Figure 22-15 Installing an OT terminal
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1624

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) Ground busbar outside the cabinet
ties to bind them.
----End
22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables

This section describes the procedure for pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables.
Context
Before installing components, pre-route CPRI fiber optic cables according to the actual routing
path to prevent the event that component installation leaves insufficient space for cabling on the
side of the cabinet.
Procedure
Step 1 Pre-route CPRI fiber optic cables through the cable holes on the top of the cabinet, as shown in
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1625

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-17 Pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing components in an IBC10.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1626

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22.6.1 Installing a USU

Every five BBUs need to be configured with one level-1 USU. This section describes the
procedure for installing a USU.
Context
For the installation positions of USUs in an AC IBC10 and a DC IBC10, see Components in
IBC10s.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Check the installation direction of the mounting ears for the USU. If the mounting
ears are installed reversely, skip this step. If the mounting ears are installed in standard mode,
reinstall them reversely as follows:
1.
Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the USU.
2.
Install the mounting ears reversely and tighten the four M4 screws on each of the mounting
ears, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 22-18 Installing mounting ears reversely
Step 2 Align cable claws with the holes on each side of the USU. Then use two M4 screws to secure
the cable claws to the USU and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1627
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Figure 22-19 Installing cable claws on a USU
NOTICE
When installing a USU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the USU with your hands and
NOTICE
The USU guide rails are above a 1 U air baffle and shorter than the air baffle. Before sliding the
USU into the cabinet along the guide rails, ensure that the USU is placed on the guide rails rather
than the air baffle, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22-20 Placing a USU on guide rails
(1) Guide rails
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
(2) Air damper

1628
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Step 3 Slide the USU along the guide rails into the cabinet, and then use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the four M6x16 screws to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22-21 Installing a USU
----End
22.6.2 Installing a BBU

This section describes the procedure for installing a BBU.
Context
For positions of BBUs in an IBC10 AC cabinet and an IBC10 DC cabinet, see Components in
IBC10s.
Procedure
Step 1 Align a cable claw with the holes on each side of the BBU case. Then use two M4 screws to
secure the cable claws to the BBU case and tighten the screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as
Figure 22-22 Installing cable claws on a BBU
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1629

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTICE
NOTICE
The BBU slide rails are above a 1 U baffle plate and shorter than the baffle plate. Before sliding
the BBU into the cabinet along the slide rails, ensure that the BBU is placed on the slide rails
rather than the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22-23 Placing a BBU on the slide rails
(1) Slide rail
(2) Baffle plate
Step 2 Slide a BBU into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the four M6x16 screws to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1630

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-24 Installing a BBU
----End
22.6.3 Installing Boards in a BBU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing boards in a BBU.
Context
This section describes the procedure for installing a UMPT and a UPEU as examples. Other
boards can be installed in the same method based on site conditions, such as the UMPT, LBBP,
UTRP, and UPEU.
Operation Rules
l
When moving a board, you must hold the board with both hands, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 22-25 Incorrect and correct operations when moving a board
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
When installing a board, you must hold the ejector lever side of the board with one hand
and hold another side of the board with the other hand to ensure that the board is moving
1631

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
in the correct direction. Do not hold the board with only one hand and never apply lateral
forces to the board. The following figure shows incorrect and correct operations when
installing a board.
Figure 22-26 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (1)
When installing a board, ensure that your hands are level so that the board and the guide
rails are on one level. Do not apply lateral forces to the board. Otherwise, the board will
be distorted. The following figure shows incorrect and correct operations when installing
a board.
Figure 22-27 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (2)
CAUTION
l Handle the board with care and avoid collision. Do not pile or compress boards after they
are unpacked.
l When inserting a board into a subrack, prevent it from colliding with the subrack and push
it into the subrack until it snaps into place.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1632

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD
gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Install a UMPT and a UPEU.
1.
Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and remove the filler panel.
2.
If there is an ejector lever on a board, raise the ejector levers on the board and remove the
board. If there is no ejector lever, directly remove the board.
3.
Push the board into the slot slowly, and lower the ejector lever.
4.
Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the board panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin).
Figure 22-28 Installing boards in a BBU
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing cables in an IBC10.

interference.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1633

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
NOTE

l

l
in a straight line.
l

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1634

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide

l
out underground.
NOTE
l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1635
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1636

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
(1) 3-hole clip
(2) 6-hole clip

l
available.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1637

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
is secured.

l
connected.
terminal.
l
following figure.

l
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
1638

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
another route.
with force.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1639

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
secured.
22.7.2 Cable Outlets

This section describes the cable layout at the cable outlets of an IBC10.
The following figure shows a planform for the cable outlets of an IBC10.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1640

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-37 Planform for the cable outlets in an IBC10
(1) Cable outlet for a signal transfer cable for a GPS power splitter (2) Left cable outlet (3) Right cable outlet
The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBC10.
Table 22-2 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBC10
Item
Description
Left cable outlet
Used for routing input power cables for the cabinet and CPRI fiber
optic cables for baseband processing boards on the left side.
Right cable outlet
Used for routing FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables,
BBU alarm cables, and CPRI fiber optic cables for baseband
processing boards on the right side.
NOTE
Remove the cover plate adjacent to the current cable outlet on the top of the cabinet for routing the cables
which cannot be routed from the current cable outlet 2 and cable outlet 3.
When CPRI fiber optic cables need to be routed out of the cabinet through the right side of the cabinet,
route them only through cable outlet 3.
22.7.3 Installing DCDU-12C power cables

This section describes the procedure for installing DCDU-12C power cables, which connect
external power equipment to the DCDU-12C and feed external power into an IBC10 DC cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1641

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Prerequisites
l
External power supply to the IBC10 has been shut off.
The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.
The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
Context
The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.

Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The IBC10 can be supplied with -48 V power. The following figure lists the specifications of a
DCDU-12C power cable.
Table 22-3 Specifications of a DCDU-12C power cable
Cable
One End
The Other
End
Cross-Sectional Area
of the Wire
Color
RTN(+) wire
OT terminal
(M6)
Depending on
the external
equipment
l One group of power

cables with a crosssectional area of 35
mm 2(0.055 in. 2)
and an upper-level
circuit breaker
supporting 1x160 A
current
Black
NEG(-) wire
Blue
l Two groups of
power cables with a
cross-sectional area
of 16 mm 2(0.025 in.
2) and an upper-level
circuit breaker
supporting 2x80 A
current
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DCDU-12C power cable.
1.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1642

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
2.
Add OT terminals at the end of the cable that connects the DCDU-12C according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable, and add a connector to
the other end of the power cable depending on the external power equipment.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for three DCDU-12Cs in the IBC10.
1.
Remove the protective cover from the DC input wiring terminal block on the DCDU-12C,
connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the DC input wiring terminals
on the DCDU-12C, and then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
2.
Install the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block, and use a screwdriver
to tighten the screw on the protective cover to 0.3 Nm (2.66 lbfin.).
3.
Connect the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.
Figure 22-38 Installing DCDU-12C power cables
bind them.
----End
22.7.4 Installing USU Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing USU power cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1643

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Context
The following table lists specifications of a USU power cable.
Table 22-4 Specifications of a USU power cable
Cable
USU power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
RTN(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
3V3 connector
NEG(-)
wire
Blue
NOTE
The colors and structures of cables vary depending on countries and regions. Cables purchased locally must
comply with local rules and regulations.
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the USU power cable. For detailed operations, see
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the USU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
Step 2 Install the USU power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the ends of the power cables with 3V3 connectors to the -48V ports on the UPEU
boards in two USUs (USU 0 and USU 1). Then tighten the screws on the connectors to
0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the other ends of the power cables with EPC4 connectors to the LOAD0 and
LOAD1 ports on top DCDU-12C (No. 0 DCDU-12C).
CAUTION
In a running base station, the USU power cable should be connected to the USU first and then
to the power equipment. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personal injury or
component damage.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1644
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Figure 22-39 Installing USU power cables
bind them.
----End
22.7.5 Installing BBU Power Cables

Context
Cable
BBU power
cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
RTN(+)
wire
Color
One End
The Other End
Black
EPC4 connector
3V3 connector

1645
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Cable
Color
NEG(-)
wire
One End
The Other End
Blue
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to a BBU power cable.
1.
2.
Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of a BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
Step 2 Install BBU power cables, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Connect the 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables to the -48V ports on the
UPEUs in two groups of BBUs (BBU 0 to BBU 4 in group 0 and BBU 0 to BBU 4 in group
1), from top to bottom. Then, tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
2.
Connect the EPC4 connectors at the other end of the BBU power cables to the LOAD0 to
LOAD4 ports on the second DCDU-12C (1#DCDU-12C) and third DCDU-12C
(2#DCDU-12C) from top to bottom.
CAUTION
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1646

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
bind them.
----End
22.7.6 (Optional) Installing BBU Alarm Cables

This section describes the procedure for installing BBU alarm cables, which transmit alarm
signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1647
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Procedure
1.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the EXT-ALM0/EXTALM1 port on the UPEU in a BBU.
2.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the external alarm equipment.
NOTE
This section describes the procedure for routing and installing BBU alarm cables in an IBC10 DC cabinet
as an example. The BBU alarm cables can be routed and installed in the same method in an IBC10 AC
cabinet.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1648

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-41 Installing BBU alarm cables
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1649

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22.7.7 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for a Fan Assembly

One end of the monitoring signal cable for a fan assembly has been installed before delivery.
You only need to connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to a BBU.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector of the monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in
a BBU, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22-42 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a fan assembly
ties to bind them.
----End
22.7.8 (Optional) Installing Interconnection Cables

This section describes the procedure for installing interconnection cables, which include
baseband interconnection cables and infrastructure interconnection cables.
Context
l
A QSFP cable connects the LBBPd in a BBU to the UCXU in a USU to exchange IQ and
SRIO data between BBUs.
An SFP cable connects the UMPT in a BBU to the UCIU in a USU to exchange management
data between BBUs and synchronize the reference clock.
Baseband interconnection cables in a cabinet and between cabinets (QSFP cables in a

cabinet and between cabinets): A 2 m (6.56 ft) electrical cable is used in a cabinet, and a
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1650

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
10 m (32.81 ft) fiber optic cable is used between cabinets. Infrastructure interconnection
cables in a cabinet and between cabinets (QSFP fiber optic cables in a cabinet and between
cabinets): A 2 m (6.56 ft) fiber optic cable is used in a cabinet, and a 10 m (32.81 ft) fiber
optic cable is used between cabinets.
l
A single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and a multimode optical module is labeled

as MM. The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode
optical module is black or gray.
Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
This section describes the procedure for installing and routing interconnection cables. For
details about interconnection cable connections in different scenarios, see section
"Interconnection Signal Cable Connections" in USU3900 Hardware Description.
NOTICE
minutes.
The following figure shows cable connections of a USU. The board configurations in the
following figure may be different from onsite configurations.
Figure 22-43 Cable connections of a USU
S0: SFP fiber optic cable
S1 and S2: QSFP cables
Procedure
Step 1 Install the SFP optical module, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1651

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-44 Installing an SFP optical module
1.
2.
Insert the optical modules into the M0 to M4 ports on the UCIU in the USU, and then insert
the optical modules of the same type into the CI ports on the UMPT boards in BBU 0 to
BBU 4.
NOTE
3.
Step 2 Install the SFP fiber optic cable, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22-45 Installing an SFP fiber optic cable
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.
2.
Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the SFP fiber optic cable into
the optical module in the UCIU, and then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at
the other end into the optical module in the UMPT.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1652
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
NOTICE
If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the USU must be connected to the
TX port on the BBU, and the RX port on the USU must be connected to the RX port on
the BBU.
Step 3 Route the SFP fiber optic cable along the right side of the cabinet by referring to the instructions
in Cabling Requirements, and then use a cable tie to bind the cable.
Step 4 Install the QSFP optical module.
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the M0 port on the UCXU in the USU, and then insert the
optical module of the same type into the HEI port on the LBBPd3 in the BBU.
3.
Step 5 Install QSFP cables.

1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the QSFP fiber optic cable.
2.
Insert the MPO connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the QSFP cable into the optical
module in the UCXU, and then insert the MPO connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other
end into the optical module in the LBBPd3.
Step 6 Route the QSFP cables along the left side of the cabinet by referring to the instructions in Cabling
Requirements, and then use cable ties to bind the cables.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1653

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-46 Installing an SFP fiber optic cable and QSFP cables
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1654

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22.7.9 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Context
l
FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.
This section describes the procedure for installing and routing FE/GE Ethernet cables. For
details about FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in different scenarios, see section
"Transmission Cable Connections" in 33900 Series Base Station Cables and USU3900
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one ends of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE/GE0 ports on the SMPT in the USU
and the UMPT or UTRP in the BBU.
Step 2 Route the other ends of FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on the
top right side of the cabinet, and then connect FE/GE Ethernet cables to the external transmission
equipment, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1655

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-47 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1656

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
22.7.10 Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables. FE/
GE fiber optic cables transmit optical signals between the BBU and the transmission equipment.
Prerequisites
NOTICE
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves to prevent damage to any module.
l The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more
than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within
20 minutes.
Context
l
This section describes the procedure for installing and routing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
For details about FE/GE fiber optic cable connections in different scenarios, see section
"Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables and USU3900
Procedure
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the FE/GE optical ports on the SMPT in the USU and the
UMPT or UTRP in the BBU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1657
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Step 2 Install FE/GE fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 22-50 and Figure 22-51.
1.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors and insert the connectors into the optical
modules in the USU and BBU.
2.
Route the fiber optic cables out from the cable hole on the top right side of the cabinet.
3.
Connect the other ends of the fiber optic cables to a routing device.
Figure 22-50 Removing dust-proof caps from a fiber optic cable
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1658

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1659

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide

This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI fiber optic cables, which transmit CPRI
signals between a BBU and an RRU.
Context
l
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in the following figure.
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the LBBPd3, and insert a new optical module
of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE
3.
1.
Remove the dust-proof cap from a connector on the fiber optic cable.
2.
Insert the LC connector at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into the optical module on
the LBBPd3, and connect the other end of the cable to an external routing device.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1660
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
3.
Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left or right side of the cabinet and route the
cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet on the top.
NOTICE
l The CPRI fiber optic cable must be routed out from the cabinet of the nearest cable outlet.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on a BBU must be connected to
the TX and RX ports on an RF module, respectively.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1661

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-53 Routing CPRI fiber optic cables
ties to bind them.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1662

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide


No.
Item
design.
21.8.2 Repainting.

No.
Item

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1663
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)
No.
Item

1664

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
No.
Item
the same direction.

This section describes the procedure for powering on an IBC10 and handling failures in the
power supply to internal components in the cabinet.
Prerequisites
l
The input power cables for the IBC10 are correctly connected.
The power supply to the IBC10 meets the requirements of the power system.
External power supply to the IBC10 has been shut off.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1665
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Power circuit breakers on a BBU have been turned off.
All power circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 have been turned off. Skip this step when
powering on an IBC10 DC cabinet.
Context
DANGER
NOTICE
Operation Process
The following figure shows the process for performing the power-on check on an IBC10.
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1666

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Figure 22-55 Power-on check on an IBC10
Procedure
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1667
DBS3900
Installation Guide

IBC10
Step 2 Turn on the circuit breaker for the external power supply to power on an IBC10.
Step 3 Optional: Turn on the power circuit breaker connected to loads on the EPU05A-02, and check
the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table. Skip this step
when powering on an IBC10 DC cabinet.
Table 22-10 Normal status of the components powered by an EPU05A-02
Component
PMU
l RUN indicator: blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)

l ALM indicator: steady off
PSU
l Power indicator: steady green

l Fault indicator: steady off
Step 4 Turn on the power circuit breaker on the UPEU in a BBU.

Step 5 Check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table.
Table 22-11 Normal status of the components
Component
BBU

l FAN: The STATE indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Fan assembly
l RUN indicator: blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)

l ALM indicator: steady off
Failure Type
Handling Measure

in the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1668

IBC10
DBS3900
Installation Guide
Failure Type
Handling Measure

BBU
Check as follows:
if necessary.
the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
terminal block.
2.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

1669

Installation Guide DBS3900

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Installation Guide DBS3900

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

DBS3900

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

6.8.2 Installing the SOU...................................................................................................................................................123

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

7.9 Subsequent Operations...............................................................................................................................................335

8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)....................344

9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)...................467

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

9.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..............................................................................................................................489

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

10.7 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................671

11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)...................682

12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).................786

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

12.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................808

13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

13.7.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1000

15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).................1106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

15.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..........................................................................................................................1126

16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C).............................1210

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

16.7 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1256

17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB...........................................1267